Home

English

1. Parameter Name TERA Range Default E i Tie Security Group Enter Password 0298 0 9999 0 75 Set Password 0299 0 9999 0 76 Access Level 0297 Serra Configure 76 Drive ID Group WF2C 0 Drive Type 0999 WEEN 4 Read Only 76 WF2K N 6 Catalog Number 0001 0 65535 Read Only 76 Serial No 1 0005 0 9952 Read Only 77 Serial No 2 0006 0 32767 Read Only 77 MCP Sw Version 0007 0 00 327 67 Read Only 77 TSP Sw Version 0009 0 00 327 67 Read Only 77 Appl Sw Version 0010 0 00 327 67 Read Only 77 Drive Temp Trip 0015 0 125 C Read Only 77 Drv Nom Current 0013 0 250 A Read Only 77 None 0 Comm Option 0003 Sn Ed Read Only 77 Metasys N2 3 Option Board 0004 ELLO 1 Read Only 78 Drive Status Group Output Freq 0020 0 00 320 00 Hz Read Only 78 Output Voltage 0022 O V to Line Voltage Read Only 78 Output Current 0023 Pea or Onve Raung in Read Only 78 Drive Load 0024 250 to 425096 Read Only 78 Drive Temp 0025 20 to 125 C Read Only 79 DC Bus Voltage 0026 0 1000 V DC Read Only 79 Motor Temp 0027 0 250 Read Only 79 Out Torque 0028 25096 to 250 Read Only 79 Out Torque Nm 0039 Varies by model Read Only 79 Output Power 0029 0 250 Read Only 79 Active Spd Ref 0031 0 00 320 00 Hz Read Only 79 Motor RPM 0033 0 5000 RPM Read Only 80 Term Strip 0 Start Stop Ctrl 0053 Keypad 1 Read Only 80 Ser Lnk 2 Table 32 1 60 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2
2. Display Function Al 1 Analog input 1 of the WF2 drive Al 2 Analog input 2 of the WF2 drive Al A Analog input A of the Analog Input Output Option Board Al B Analog input B of the Analog Input Output Option Board Al C Analog input C of the Analog Input Output Option Board 0 Range see table Ref1 Config Default Al 1 Ref2 Config Default Al 2 Ref3 Config Default Al 2 EMOP Config Address 0420 The WF2 drive supports a variety of configurations for EMOP operation The configurations are based on whether the digital inputs on the terminal strip may be used to change the EMOP reference speed or whether the Up and Down Arrow keys on the digital keypad may also be used to change the EMOP reference speed To use a digital input configure two digital inputs using the parameters in the Digital Inputs Group see page 110 In addition to configuring what controls the EMOP reference speed you may configure whether the reference speed is reset when a Stop or a power cycle occurs or only when a power cycle occurs or does not reset If the reference speed is reset the reference speed upon a re start is the minimum frequency The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function None EMOP is not utilized Digital inputs are used to change EMOP reference speed and the TS no Mem EMOP reference speed is lost upon Stop or a power cycle Digi
3. Bit When Set to 1 Signifies Bit When Set to 1 Signifies 8 Alternate ramp 1 is active 0 SLC active SLO is available 9 Alternate ramp 2 is active 1 SLF active SLO is available 10 Drive is in Remote 2 Drive is running in Forward 11 Keypad controls direction 3 Drive is running in Reverse 12 DC injection braking is active 4 FEXT2 is active serial link reference 13 Drive is jogging 5 Drive is accelerating 14 Run commanded zero speed 6 Drive is decelerating 15 Drive is faulted locked out 7 Drive is at speed 0 Range 0 65535 Default Status Word 3 Read Only Address 0052 The bits of the word represented by this parameter provide the following information 0 1 s 1 13 12 8 too 8 7 6 5 2 3 2 1 Bit When Set to 1 Signifies Bit When Set to 1 Signifies 8 Sequencer application enabled O iDrive is ready to run EN is active 9 Sequencer application running 1 State of EN input 10 Sequencer application paused 2 Forced Local control is active 11 not used 3 A warning is active 12 not used 4 Drive is operating in Current Limit 13 Drive is in the undervoltage state 5 Drive is operating in Torque Limit 14 Overtemperature warning 6 Loss of 4 20 mA follower detected 15 Drive is faulted not locked out 7 Broken wire detection activated 0 Range 0 65535 Default 7 24 PID Configure Group 07 11 03 This group contains parameters that configure the
4. 1 Only available for Modbus communication parameter Comm Protocol set to RTU or ASCIl 2 Only available for DeviceNet communication a DeviceNet option board is installed and parameter Comm Protocol is set to DeviceNet 3 The default setting for DeviceNet may be changed to either 250K or 500K but the change will not take effect until power is cycled Range see table Default Comm Parity Address 0902 This parameter sets the parity and the number of data and stop bits recognized by the serial communication port If parameter Comm Protocol is set to DeviceNet the value of this pa rameter cannot be changed from its default value The following may be assigned Display Function N81 No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit N82 No parity 8 data bits 2 stop bits E81 Even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit O81 Odd parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit Range see table Default N81 Comm Drop Address 0903 This parameter sets the drop number of the serial communication port If parameter Comm Protocol is set to RTU or ASCII the range is from 1 to 247 with a default of 1 if itis set to DeviceNet the range is O to 63 with a default of 63 Note that when DeviceNet protocol is used you may change the drop number set in this parameter but the change will not take effect until power is cycled Range 1 247 or 0 63 Default 1 or 63 Comm Timeout Address 0904 The seria
5. Keypad Control 0875 SKP 0 Both 1 Both No Fit 2 EKP 3 No Fit 4 Varies 129 Special Group Param STO RCL 0982 Select 0 Factry Rst 1 Store Parm 2 Select 130 Application 0981 Load Param 3 Sequencer 1 Normal 2 Normal 130 Program Number 0983 Reset Elapsed Runtime 10 Reset Elapsed MWh 20 131 Communication Group Comm Protocol 0900 RTU 0 ASCII 1 DeviceNet 2 Siemens P1 3 Metasys N2 4 RTU 131 172 Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting Disabled 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 Comm Baudrate 0901 19 2K 5 Depends on Protocol 131 38 4K 6 125K 7 250K 8 500K 9 N81 0 N82 1 Comm Parity 0902 E81 2 N81 132 O81 3 Comm Drop 0903 1 247 or 0 63 1 or 63 132 Comm Timeout 0904 1 60s 5s 132 9600 4 EKP Baudrate 0906 19 2K 5 19 2K 133 EKP Timeout 0907 2 0 60 0 s 2 0s 133 Cntl Word 1 0201 0 65535 0 133 Cntl Word 2 0202 0 65535 0 134 Ext Freq Ref 1 0203 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 00 Hz 134 Ext Freq Ref 2 0205 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 00 Hz 134 Status Word 1 0050 0 65535 Read Only 134 Status
6. Line mm Motor mm 2011 0x 16 0 1 16 0 1 16 0 1 16 0 1 2015 0x 16 0 1 16 0 1 16 0 1 16 0 I 2018 5x 2 2 2 2 2022 0x 2 2 2 2 Table 8 Recommended Wire Gauges 230 V AC Models 1 Use wire rated 90 C in an environment where the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C 122 F 2 Contact BERGES for further information Model Number 460 VAC WF2K Line mm Motor mm 4000 7x 2 5 2 5 4001 5x 2 5 2 5 4002 2x 2 5 2 5 4003 7x 2 5 2 5 4005 5x 4 0 4 0 4007 5x 4 0 4 0 4011 0x 6 0 6 0 4015 0x 6 0 1 6 0 M 4018 5x 10 0 M 10 0 1 4022 0x 16 0 l 16 0 1 4030 0x 16 01 16 01 4037 0x 2 2 4045 0x 2 2 4055 0x 2 2 Table 9 Recommended Wire Gauges 460 V AC Models 1 Use wire rated 90 C in an environment where the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C 122 F 2 Contact BERGES for further information Model Number 575 V AC WF2K Line mm Motor mm 5000 7x 2 5 2 5 5001 5x 2 5 2 5 5002 2x 2 5 2 5 5003 7x 2 5 2 5 5005 5x 2 5 2 5 5007 5x 4 0 4 0 5011 0x 6 0 6 0 5015 0x 10 0 10 0 Table 10 Recommended Wire Gauges 575 V AC Models TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 29 Connections Model Number 575 V AC WF2K Line mm Motor mm 5018 5x 10 0 10 0 5022 0x 10 0
7. D8 D7 a D7 O 2 D6 O 5 D6 O 5 D5 Run Jog b D5 O DAT o F D4 RwWog D3 D3 Y o Stop z D2 Run 5 D2 lt PIS Di Q4d f D1 94 Stet i 3 24 Q 24 Q 24 O 424 24 or NC 24 O or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 17 Example of Connections for Run Jog DI Mode Active Low Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information TB4 TB4 CM CM EN EN D10 D10 D9 D9 O D8 D8 9 D7 O 5 D7 3 D6 5 D6 5 D5 O Jog 9 D5 O j E D4 Q Je 3 D4 94 D3 Y E D3 E D2 Run i DAT Soto Step Dil oo 8 DA Q4 Testat is 24 Q 24 Q 24 O 55 24 ss 24 or NC 424 O or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 18 Example of Connections for the Pushbutton Jog Mode Forward Operation Only Active Low Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB Connections TB4 CM CM EN EN D10 Jog D10 Jog D9 Reverse D9 Reverse D8 doo 1 D8 o D7 Forward D7 cr a D6 es 3 D6 Forward 3 D5 eem pe D5 3 gs Bence E D4 j a E D3 Run T D3 El x O c D2 Forward g D2 E D1 E D1 Forward
8. In the Direct Parameter Access Mode you may navigate directly to a parameter by entering the parameter s address Parameter addresses are shown in section 7 and 11 You ac cess this mode by pressing SHIFT DIR F4 or by selecting Direct Params from the Menu Display Mode Once this mode is active you may enter a new value for the parameter by keying in the value on the numeric keypad rather than scrolling to the desired value Note that if no keys are pressed for 10 minutes while this mode is active the drive will automat ically revert to the Operate mode To configure the value of a parameter in this mode follow these steps 1 When the Direct Parameter Access Mode is entered the display will ask you for the ad dress of the desired parameter number as shown below Direct Params Param Number XXXX RDY 30 00Hz LOC Obtain the parameter address from chapter 11 and type the address As you type the address it will appear on the third line of the display Press ENT TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 65 Set up and Getting Started 66 4 The parameter will be displayed and will show its current value Note that this value may be an actual number such as 120 Hz or a function such as 2 wire If the value is an actual number the fourth line will show the range for the parameter If the value is a func tion a range is not provided Typical displays for these two types of
9. action is commanded The following table shows the sixteen hexadecimal values and the corresponding binary values The binary values are divided into four columns so you may more readily see which bits of the status or control words are affected by the binary values Hexadecimal Value Binary Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 8 1 0 0 0 9 1 0 0 1 A 1 0 1 0 B 1 0 1 1 C 1 1 0 0 D 1 1 0 1 E 1 1 1 0 F 1 1 1 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Corresponding Bit Positions of Parameter Words TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 179 Fundamentals of PID Control 13 Fundamentals of PID Control 13 1 Introduction WF2 drives have a built in PID Proportional Integral Derivative Controller that makes it possible to control a process by adjusting motor speed using a reference input and a feed back input When the drive is configured to operate with feedback from a transducer the WF2 drive essentially ceases to be a frequency controller and instead becomes a process controller Several WF2 parameters are specifically designed for PID control These include PID Configure PID Direct Type Feedback Config Feedback Gain PID Prop Gain lt PID Int Gain PID Deriv Gain The function performed by each of these parameters is described in the following section Fi
10. which must be digital input D1 You cannot use another digital input for the Start input In addition the Enable circuit must be closed for the drive to be started The drive is stopped on the falling edge of a pulse on the Stop digital input which must be digital input D2 You cannot use another digital input for the Stop input when 3 wire control is utilized Forward and Reverse Control An additional digital input may be added to the basic single direction 2 wire and 3 wire con trol discussed in the previous section to allow control in two directions The WF2 drive sup ports two types of directional control Forward Reverse DI or Run Forward Run Reverse The choice between the two is determined by the setting of parameter Reverse Mode which configures how digital inputs command Forward and Reverse see page 85 for more information on the Reverse Mode parameter In Forward Reverse DI mode one digital input initiates Run and a second digital input se lects whether the direction is Forward or Reverse The starting and stopping of the drive is accomplished in the same manner and using the same digital inputs as in the previous sec tion In Run Forward Run Reverse mode a digital input is assigned to be the Run Reverse input The required D1 digital input for starting then becomes the Run Forward input by default Figure 9 shows an example of this type of two direction control with D5 assigned as the Run Reverse input 07 11 03 TB
11. 5 3 4 Phase Imbalance Phase voltage imbalance of the input AC source can cause unbalanced currents and ex cessive heat in the drive s input rectifier diodes and DC bus capacitors Phase imbalance can also damage motors running directly across the line Z CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Never use power factor correction capacitors on motor terminals T1 U T2 V or T3 W of the E trAC WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive Doing so will damage the semiconductors Failure to observe this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage 5 3 5 Power System Configuration Before connecting line power to a WF2 drive determine the configuration of the power sys tem If the configuration cannot be determined with exactitude at least have a solid under standing of how the power system is configured Numerous configurations of distribution transformers are in use today throughout the world The principal difference between these various configurations is the means used to introduce a connection to earth ground The primary consideration should be to measure the voltages from line to line all combina tions in a three phase system and the voltage from each line connection to earth ground Ensure that each voltage measurement does not exceed the input voltage rating including tolerance for your particular model If you discover different results than expected contact BERGES for assistance Failure to observe these precautions may void the
12. All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Seq Configure Group Sequencer Application Display Condition Causing Advancement to Step n 1 DI8 Time Either digital input D8 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DI9 Time Either digital input D9 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DHO Time Either digital input D10 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses l Either the signal input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in pa AliL Time rameter Al Low Thres n or the configured time elapses Al2H Time Either the signal input to analog input 2 goes above the value set in pa rameter Al High Thres n or the configured time elapses Fi Time id function key 1 setto Step Change or the configured time elaps F2 Time EUR function key 2 set to Step Change or the configured time elaps 0 Range see table Default Disabled Goto X Step n Address See chapter 11 This parameter configures the condition that will cause the Sequencer application to move from step n to step x where x is the step set in parameter X Step n see page 155 The following conditions may be assigned to this parameter Display Condition Causing Advancement to Step X Disabled The Sequencer application does not advance DIG Digital input D6 Parameter D6 Configure must also be set to Step Change DI7 Digital input D7 Parameter D
13. LED Name Duration Operating Condition POWER Continuous The drive is powered up Abnormal operation is detected but the abnormality is not se WARNING Continuous vere enough to cause a fault Abnormal operation is detected but the abnormality is greater FAULT Continuous than a warning The drive will halt operation when a fault is de tected 6 5 Security Access Levels The WF2 drive allows you to configure access levels to prevent unauthorized access Two levels of access are available e Configure Access a user may read all WF2 parameters and configure the non read only parameters provided the drive is stopped This is the default setting for access Configure Run Access a user may read all WF2 parameters and configure the non read only parameters whether the drive is running or stopped although some parame ters may only be configured if the drive is stopped An access level is assigned by setting the value of parameter Access Level found in the Security Group see page 76 for more information on this parameter The password actu ally a four digit pass number for the security level is set by parameter Set Password see page 76 6 5 2 Gaining Access when Security Enabled Standard Keypad When security is enabled and the PROG key or SHIFT PROG keys are pressed to enter programming mode all parameters except the Enter Password parameter will be locked To unlock the pa
14. Parameters Display Displayed See Display Displayed See Order Group Name Page Order Group Name Page 1 Security 75 13 Braking Options 106 2 Drive ID 76 14 Digital Inputs 110 3 Drive Status 78 15 Analog Inputs 113 4 Input Status 81 16 Digital Outputs 117 5 Control Modes 83 17 Analog Outputs 120 6 Speed Reference 88 18 Fault Management 122 7 Ramps 92 19 Display Options 127 8 Preset Speeds 96 20 Special 130 9 Skip Freq 97 21 Communication 131 10 Torque Limits 98 22 PID Configure 135 11 Drive Output 100 23 Seq Configure 148 12 Motor Setup 103 Table 27 The Parameter Groups for the WF2 Drive Display Parameter See Display Parameter See Order Name Page Order Name Page 1 Output Freq 78 11 Minimum Freq 88 2 Output Voltage 78 12 Maximum Freq 89 3 Output Current 78 13 Accel Time 1 92 4 Drive Load 78 14 Decel Time 1 92 5 Drive Temp 79 15 Preset Speed 1 96 6 DC Bus Voltage 79 16 Preset Speed 2 96 7 2 Wire 3 Wire 83 17 Preset Speed 3 96 8 Jog Mode 84 18 A1 Configure 113 9 Reverse Mode 85 19 R1 Configure 118 10 Terminal Keypad 85 20 R2 Configure 118 Table 28 This parameter group allows you to configure security for the drive See page 68 for more information on security Enter Password Address 0298 If the Set Password parameter is set to a non zero value security is enabled and a user must enter a password to gain entry The Enter Password parameter is set by the user to the value of the password which is then compared to the value in the Set Pass
15. Range 0 1 200 0 s Default 30 0 s AR1 Configure Address 0450 This parameter selects when Alternate Ramp 1 AR1 is invoked Parameters Accel Time 2 and Decel Time 2 see page 92 for information on these parameters configure the slope of the ramp while AR1 Ramp Type determines the shape of the ramp see page 94 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function None AR1 is not available A digital input is used to select AR1 While the input is true AR1 is in use AR1 on DI When the drive reaches a preset frequency AR1 is invoked and re mains in effect until the frequency drops below the threshold The fre quency is set by parameter AR1 Switch Freq see page 95 for more information AR1 by Frq When a Start command occurs AR1 is invoked and remains in effect until the reference speed is reached Once an At Speed condition is at AR1 Strt tained the main ramp is used for reference changes When a Stop command occurs AR1 is invoked and remains in effect until zero speed is reached When the drive begins operation in Reverse AR1 is invoked and re ES mains in effect until the direction changes Default AR1 on DI AR2 Configure Address 0451 This parameter selects when Alternate Ramp 2 AR2 is invoked Parameters Accel Time 3 and Decel Time 3 see page 92 for information on these parameters configure the slope of the ramp while AR2 Ramp Type dete
16. or 320 Current S Address Range Value Address Available Functions Value Figure 29 Enhanced Keypad Display of the Two Types of Parameters 7 Change the displayed value to the desired value For parameters that configure a func tion use the up or down arrow key to move the cursor to the desired function and then press ENT Note that the second line does not show the function just configured instead it shows a number corresponding to its position in the function list with O being the first function listed For example in figure 29 the number 1 for the current value indicates that 2 wire is selected not 3 wire For parameters that are assigned a value you may also scroll to the desired value by using the up and or down arrow keys and then pressing ENT to store the new value Al ternately you could use the numeric keypad to type the parameter s value With either type of values if you change your mind and do not wish to save the selected value and you have not yet pressed ENT press ESC to abort and return to the display showing the parameters in the parameter group After configuring the value of the parameter the list of parameters will return to the dis play You may now select another parameter from the same group to configure or press ESC to return to the list of parameter groups To return to the Operate Mode press SHIFT OPR F2 or navigate to it via the Menu Display mode The Direct Parameter Access Mode
17. 0 75 55 0 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name eee Range Default s eae Term Strip 0 Freq Ref Ctrl 0054 Keypad 1 Read Only 80 Ser Lnk 2 Drive Lifetime 0890 0 65535 Read Only 80 Drv Life Format 0891 50 51 or 52 Read Only 80 Elapsed Runtime 0892 0 65535 Read Only 80 Runtime Format 0893 50 51 or 52 Read Only 80 MWh Lifetime 0894 0 65535 Read Only 81 MWh Life Format 0895 51 52 or 53 Read Only 81 Elapsed MWh 0896 0 65535 Read Only 81 MWh Format 0897 51 52 or 53 Read Only 81 Seq Start Ctrl 3007 Varies Read Only 147 Current Step 3003 1 10 Read Only 148 Step Time Min 3005 0 65535 min Read Only 148 Step Time Sec 3006 0 60 s Read Only 148 Input Status Group D1 Status 0150 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 81 D2 Status 0151 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 81 D3 Status 0152 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 81 D4 Status 0153 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 81 D5 Status 0154 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 81 D6 Status 0155 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 D7 Status 0156 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 D8 Status 0157 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 D9 Status 0158 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 D10 Status 0159 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 EN Status 0160 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 A1 Level 0164 100 100 Read Only 82 A2 Level 0165 0 100 Read Only 82 DQ1 Status 0167 Off or On 0 or
18. 6 7 3 Drive Control via the Serial Link liiis 73 6 7 4 Override of Serial Link Control 0 00 000 ccc eee en 73 T Parameters ivi uude uius er ee le UR TR eee D d da ee e a A ee oe t tte 74 7 1 IntrO dUctlonz ix kaa ak ab seek ued a PEE ERE PUE La ee S wan Ed OX ERU RR A 74 7 2 Parameter Groups o 74 7 3 Security Groups kan debet ac T ede ope del e qt dedi d b er der I deed 75 7 4 DriveID Group bei UPPER ds Nu pP n RPM Ly b 76 7 5 Drive Status Group o 78 7 6 Input Status Group occ 81 7 7 Control Modes Group escran tioi na pala eta OS VER eRe iia iia 83 7 8 Speed Reference Group 0 00 ccc ehh 88 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Table of Contents 7 9 Ramps Group Js so vc et Mean di eio givens CE tuse o ute e Rue 92 7310 Preset Speeds Gro p suco a a mai MERO S ee ai 96 TS Skip Freg Group eee iae he per ede ode D o Seded ar te YE Rd Tan 97 FAS Torque Limits Group etri conset Sede pd eae VEA Ep 98 413 Dive Output Groups sus Seius ERE A EU ER RERUM E A A PENNE 100 7 14 Motor Setup GROUP 103 7 15 Braking Options Group zoe ek REG Peri aes EXE EGRE XH URP ER Rus 106 16 Digitallnputs Group ciuis t Re ERE RH ee ED BEER sa ht See RES 110 7 17 Analg Inputs Group ssia jana aaa ana Ja nenga aga a teens 113 LANG Digital OUPUSGIOUP x oir vam gabig date pius Eu Ria Sede Can aa ENG LINER Ret 117 7 19 Analog Outputs Gr0Up
19. AR2 Ramp Type 0456 S Curve 1 Linear 95 AR2 S Rounding 0457 0 0 10 0 s 0 0s 95 AR2 Switch Freq 0464 0 00 320 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 95 Jog Accel Time 0458 0 0 3200 0 s 1 0s 95 Jog Decel Time 0459 0 0 3200 0 s 1 0s 95 Ramp Ref Frq 0460 0 00 320 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 95 Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 164 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name eee Range Default ie eer Preset Speeds Group Preset Speed 1 0350 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 15 00 Hz 96 Preset Speed 2 0352 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 10 00 Hz 96 Preset Speed 3 0354 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 20 00 Hz 96 Preset Speed 4 0356 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 130 00 Hz 96 Preset Speed 5 0358 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 40 00 Hz 96 Preset Speed 6 0360 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 2050 00 Hz 97 Preset Speed 7 0362 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 60 00 Hz 97 Skip Freq Group Skip 1 Low Lim 0480 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 97 Skip 1 Hi Lim 0481 ler Himn to Masi de 97 Skip 2 Low Lim 0482 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 97 Skip 2 Hi Lim 0483 nre Hmc Mex loo He 97 Skip 3 Low Lim 0484 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 97 Skip 3 Hi Lim 0485 UE Limito Maxe lo ee 98 Skip 4 Low Lim 0486 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 98 Skip 4 Hi Lim 0487 MURIS Lim to Maxi io 98 Skip 5 Low Lim 0488 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 98 Skip 5 Hi Lim
20. Range 6 48 96 or 3072 times the frequency Default 6 Current Level 1 Address 0830 This parameter sets the first threshold expressed as a percentage of the nominal drive cur rent Range 0 200 Default 0 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Current Level 2 Address 0831 This parameter sets the second threshold expressed as a percentage of the nominal drive current Range 0 200 Default 0 Torque Level 1 Address 0832 This parameter sets the first torque threshold expressed as a percentage of the nominal torque Range 0 200 Default 0 Torque Level 2 Address 0833 This parameter sets the second torque threshold expressed as a percentage of the nomi nal torque Range 0 200 Default 0 Freq Level 1 Address 0834 This parameter sets the first frequency threshold Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Freq Level 2 Address 0835 This parameter sets the second frequency threshold Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Freq Level 3 Address 0836 This parameter sets the third frequency threshold Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Drive Temp Lvl Address 0837 This parameter sets the temperature threshold at which a digital output may be configured to change state which in effect allows you to configure a warning of an impending over temperature fault It is expressed as a percentag
21. Range see table Default Disabled Keypad Control Address 0875 This parameter configures the type of keypad that is connected to the WF2 drive either standard enhanced or both and the response of the drive if communication with the key pad is lost The following functions may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 129 Parameters Special Group Display Function This is only available for B and D models and denotes that a standard keypad is attached to the drive If communication with the keypad is lost fault code 40 will be generated This is the default value for models other than N models This is only available for B and D models and denotes that both a Both standard and an enhanced keypad are connected to the drive Fault code 40 is generated if communication with either keypad is lost Same as Both except that if communication is lost with either keypad 1 Bal Na Eli a fault will not be generated and the drive will continue to operate This is only available for N models and denotes that an enhanced key pad is connected to the drive Fault code 40 is generated if communi EKP cation with the enhanced keypad does not occur in the amount of time specified in parameter EKP Timeout see page 133 This is the de fault value for N models Same as EKP except that a fault will not be generated if communica 1 NOR tion with the keypad do
22. The following functions may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Display Options Group Parameters Display Function Disabled The fault cannot be auto reset Enabled The fault can be auto reset o Range see table Default Disabled Ext Fit AR Address 0870 This parameter allows you to make the external fault or warning F7 capable of being auto reset The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled The fault cannot be auto reset Enabled The fault can be auto reset 0 Range see table Default Disabled Mtr Ovid AR Address 0879 This parameter allows you to make the motor overload fault F20 capable of being auto reset The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled The fault cannot be auto reset Enabled The fault can be auto reset 0 Range see table Default Disabled 7 21 Display Options Group This parameter group contains parameters that configure the functionality of the keypad display as well as the language used for the display Display Mode Address 0955 This parameter configures what information is shown on the display of the digital keypad in Operate mode The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Std Displ The out
23. fone a EN ENTIS ES RS cup DE IAS 7 Serial No 2 Drive Load D4 Status 1 Jog Mode 1 p Decel Time 2 Prese peta Skip 2 Hi Lim Tra EM Slip Comp Page 77 Page 78 Page 81 J i Page 84 E Page 90 Page 92 Page 96 Page 97 Page 99 Page 102 MCP Sw Drive Temp f Ds Status i Reverse i Ref1 Config 1 Accel PresetSpeed MI Skip 3 Trq Lim Mtr V Boost Version Page 79 Page 81 Mode Page 90 Time 3 5 Low Lim Rev Config Page 77 SE 909 j Page85 9 Page 92 Page 96 Page 97 Page 99 Page 102 TSP Sw DCBus 1 Terminal sa 2T Decel Preset Speed M Skip 3 Hi Trq Lim Reg 7 Version Voltage buco Keypad je Time 3 6 Lim Rev MEL Page 77 J Page 79 5 iji Page 85 i Page 92 Page 97 Page 98 Page 100 Appl Sw WB Loca BT EMOP PresetSpeed MI Skip 4 F Boost Taper Version Maoa 79 iir Remote nee cour Ramp Time 7 Low Lim Teepe 106 Frq Page 77 9 9 J Page 86 9 Page 93 Page 97 Page 98 9 Page 103 Drive Temp Out Torque WB Loca E evoP AR1 WB Skip 4 Hi Boost Taper Trip 96 Da la Config Config Configure Lim Pia 100 Vit Page 77 Page 79 g J Page 86 Page 91 Page 93 Page 98 Page 103 Drv Nom Out Torque D9 Status WH Remote Set Fixed AR2 W skip5 Regen Current Nm Page 82 Config Speed Configure Low Lim Timeout Page 77 J Page 79 Page 87 Page 91 Page 93 Page 98 Page 100 Option Board Output Power D10 Status Catch on Fly Set k Factor i Dd Skips Hi Page 78
24. puts This parameter Trq Limit Type establishes how the feature will be enabled The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled Torque limiting will not be used When the measured torque exceeds the limit set by either Trq Lim Mtr Fwd Trq Lim Reg Fwd Trq Lim Mtr Rev or Trq Lim Reg Rev de Fion Evis pending on what the motor and drive are doing torque limiting is ena bled See page 99 for a description of these parameters By DI Torque limiting is enabled when a digital input is true See page 98 for information on configuring a digital input to limit torque The analog input identified in parameter Trq Lim Al see page 100 is monitored and as it changes so does the value of each of the four torque limits named for Fixed Lvls The values of the limits are found Follow Al by multiplying the percentage of full scale being input on the analog in put by the configured torque limits For example if Trq Lim Mtr Fwd is set to 150 and A2 is at half scale then the actual torque limit when motoring forward is 75 When the drive s output frequency is greater than the value set by Trq On Freq Lim Freq see page 100 torque limiting is enabled Range see table Default Disabled Trq Lim Mtr Fwd Address 0332 This parameter sets the torque limiting point when the drive is in motoring mode in the For ward direction The limit is expressed as a perce
25. 1 5045 0x 1 5055 0x 1 Table 15 Recommended Fuses 575 V AC Models 1 Contact BERGES for further information 5 5 Dynamic Braking 34 The WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive is supplied with an integrated dynamic braking DB re sistor and is designed to have adequate dynamic braking for most applications In cases where short stopping times or high inertia loads require additional braking capacity two ap proaches may be taken Purchase and install an external DB unit or Purchase and install an external resistor These methods are described in more detail in the following sections TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 5 5 1 Connections Dynamic Braking Units One method for adding braking capacity is to purchase a dynamic braking unit either model WDB211 for 230 V AC WF2 drives model WDB411 for 460 V AC WF2 drives or model WDB510 for 575 V AC WF2 drives These units allow the addition of braking capacity by utilizing off the shelf options Braking capacity is added in 7 5 kW increments and multiple units may be connected to a single drive To add a DB unit to a WF2 drive connect it to the B and B or B and DB1 terminals the terminals are labeled differently depending on the horsepower rating of the drive see page 31 for more information and set parameter DB Config to Ext DB WDB see page 106 for more information on this parameter Se
26. 1 Read Only 82 DQ2 Status 0168 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 DQ3 Status 0169 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 R1 Status 0170 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 R2 Status 0171 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 82 AQ1 Level 0174 0 100 Read Only 82 AQ2 Level 0175 0 100 Read Only 83 AINA Level 0264 0 100 Read Only 83 AINB Level 0269 0 100 Read Only 83 AINC Level 0274 0 100 Read Only 83 AQA Level 0278 0 100 Read Only 83 Table 32 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 161 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name Memory Address Range Default See Page User Setting AQB Level 0282 0 100926 Read Only 83 RA Status 0285 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 83 RB Status 0286 Off or On 0 or 1 Read Only 83 Control Modes Group 2 Wire 3 Wire 0401 2 Wire 0 3 Wire 1 2 Wire 83 Start Mode 0402 Line Start L 0 Auto Start 1 Line Start L 84 Stop Mode 0403 Rmp to Stp 0 Cst to Stp 1 DCI to Stp 2 Rmp to Stp 84 Jog Mode 0404 No Jogging 0 Run Jog DI 1 Jog Pshbutton 2 No Jogging 84 Reverse Mode 0405 Non revers 0 For Rev DI 1 Run FwdRev 2 Non revers 85 Terminal Keypad 0406 Kypd C amp R 0 TS C amp R 1 TS C KP R 2 KP C TS R 3 T K by DI 4 T K Fkey 5 T K SerLnk 6 Kypd C amp R 85 Local Remote 0407 None 0 L R by DI
27. 1 Parameters Added to the Drive Status Group ooccoocococcocoo eee 147 10 3 2 Parameters Added to the Ramps Group lsissleleeelee sees 148 10 3 8 Seq Configure Group aa tenes 148 11 Summary of WF2 Parameters e a a aaa aaa aa aaa aa aaa aaa ae 156 11 1 Parameter Groups a a aa a ea a aaa aaa aaa hr rrr 156 11 2 Parameters Available in Level 1 Programming Standard Keypad Only aaa 156 12 Hexadecimal to Binary Conversion eh 179 13 Fundamentals of PID Control eh 180 13 1 Introd UCctlOn ute reet et ere b er died andr iet ein ie BS 180 13 2 Configuration of PID Control Parameters o ooococcocooccco ees 180 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 3 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Table of Contents 13 3 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 2 4 13 2 5 13 2 6 13 2 7 Tuning the PID Control Loop Parameter PID Configure Parameter PID Direct Type Parameter Feedback Config Parameter Feedback Gain Parameter PID Prop Gain Parameter PID Int Gain Parameter PID Deriv Gain TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB 1 General Information 1 1 07 11 03 08 GB Safety and Operating Instructions for Drive Converters 1 General In operation drive converters depending on their degree of protection may have live unisolated and possibly also moving or rotating parts as well as hot
28. 1 and 2 Spd R2 R1 The difference between references 2 and 1 Spd R1 R3 The difference between references 1 and 3 Spd R3 R1 The difference between references 3 and 1 Spd R2 R3 The difference between references 2 and 3 Spd R3 R2 The difference between references 3 and 2 S R1 R2 R3 The summation of references 1 and 2 less reference 3 S R1 R3 R2 The summation of references 1 and 3 less reference 2 Spd Fixed The speed reference is constant and is set by parameter Set Fixed Speed see page 91 The speed reference is set by the binary word consisting of D3 through D10 with D3 being the least significant bit and D10 the most significant bit All digital inputs must be properly configured for proper function If a digital input is not configured that input is considered inactive 0 8Bit DI PS The output frequency is computed by using the following formula to convert the 8 bit binary word 8bbw in the formula into a decimal val ue Output Frequency 8bbw x Max Frequency Min Frequency Range see table Ref1 Config Address 0810 Ref2 Config Address 0811 Default Spd Fixed Ref3 Config Address 0812 These parameters establish which analog input sets the reference indicated in the param eter name The values that may be assigned to this parameter are as follows TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Speed Reference Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters
29. 10 0 5030 0x 16 01 16 0 M 5037 0x 2 2 5045 0x 2 2 5055 0x 2 2 Table 10 Recommended Wire Gauges 575 V AC Models 1 Use wire rated 90 C in an environment where the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C 122 F 2 Contact BERGES for further information 5 3 Input Line Requirements 5 3 1 Line Voltage See the Power and Current Ratings table on page 10 for the allowable fluctuation of AC line voltage for your particular WF2 model A supply voltage above or below the limits given in the table will cause the drive to trip with either an overvoltage or undervoltage fault When supplying line voltages other than the factory default values either 230 V AC 460 V AC or 575 V AC depending on the model set the Supply Voltage parameter see page 106 to the appropriate value Exercise caution when applying the WF2 drive on low line conditions For example a WF2 2000 series inverter will operate properly on a 208 V AC line but the maximum output voltage will be limited to 208 V AC Now if a motor rated for 230 V AC line voltage is controlled by this drive higher motor currents and increased heating will result Therefore ensure that the voltage rating of the motor matches the applied line voltage If other than 60 Hz output is desired proper V Hz can be programmed into the WF2 drive by setting the Nom Mtr Voltage and Nom Mtr Freq parameters see page 104 for more infor mation 5 3 2 Line Capacity
30. 10 kQ On Off 0 4 to 20 mA DC 250 Q On On Table 18 DIP Switch Settings PC587 PC687 and PC762 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 39 Connections 40 Type of Input Signal swi 4 swi 2 swi 3 Sw1 4 sw1 5 SW1 6 and Range Analog Input 1 0to 10 V DC I Off Off Off Off 0to5 V DC Ul On Off Off Off 10 V DC 1 Off Off Off Off 0 4 to 20 mA DC 50 Q Off On On Off 0 4 to 20 mA DC 250 Q On Off Off On Analog Input 2 0to 10 V DC lI Off Off 0to 5 V DC Ul On Off 0 4 to 20 mA DC 250 Q On On Table 19 DIP Switch Settings PC653 and PC655 1 The analog input impedance for voltage signals for PC653 input output boards is 10 kQ The analog input impedance for voltage signals for PC655 input output boards is 100 kQ 5 6 3 Control Wiring Connections Active High Logic This section provides information on making typical control wiring connections when the digital inputs use Active High logic pull up logic This is the default type of logic used by the WF2 drive If desired Active Low logic may be utilized by setting parameter Active Logic to Active Low see page 110 for more information Section 5 6 4 starting on page 48 provides con nection drawings that utilize active low logic Single Direction Control The WF2 drive supports either 2 or 3 wire control Figure 8 shows the connections to the digita
31. 2 2 Parameter PID Direct Type Parameter PID Direct Type configures another characteristic of PID control whether the loop is direct acting or reverse acting also known as inverse acting In a direct acting loop as the process speed increases the feedback signal will decrease and cause a corresponding decrease in the process speed as it approaches the regulation point In other words as the regulation point is approached the error between the reference signal and the feedback signal decreases resulting in a decrease in the process speed This type is typically employed in pump applications where level control is the process var iable Conversely in an inverse acting loop as the process speed increases the feedback signal increases but causes a corresponding decrease in the process speed as it approaches the regulation point In other words as the regulation point is approached if the error between the reference signal and the feedback signal increases due to an increase in the feedback signal then the process speed will increase This type is typically employed in supply pump applications where pressure is the process variable 13 2 3 Parameter Feedback Config Parameter Feedback Config allows you to configure the source for the feedback signal This source may be Ref 1 Ref 2 or Ref 3 Each of these sources are configurable to map to either the A1 or A2 analog input of the WF2 drive or analog inputs A B or C of the Analog Inpu
32. 20 mA DC signal may be input with Normal this selection but parameters A1 Span and A1 Offset may need to be adjusted to provide the desired drive performance Broken Wire Det Monitor for broken wire from potentiometer Bipolar Both positive and negative values sent Range is 4 to 20 mA DC A fixed offset of 20 and span of 100 are 4 20 mA included with this selection Parameters A1 Offset and A1 Span may be used to refine input calibration Bi directional speed command from uni directional reference Os 0a pea 5 V DC zero speed 0 Range see table Default Normal TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 113 Parameters 114 Analog Inputs Group A1 Invert Address 0742 This parameter configures whether the signal being sent to terminals A11 and A12 analog input 1 is inverted that is whether the minimum input corresponds to the maximum fre quency The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Normal Not inverted minimum input is minimum frequency Inverted Inverted minimum input is maximum frequency Range see table Default Normal A1 Span Address 0743 Provided parameter A1 Configure is not set to 4 20 mA this parameter is used to alter the range of the input being sent to terminals A11 and A12 analog input 1 For example with a0to 10 V DC input setting this parameter to a value of 50 alt
33. 24 24 24 oo 24 oo 24 or NC 424 or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 19 Example of Connections for the Forward and Reverse Jogging Active Low Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information TB4 CM EN Y D10 D9 PS In 1 D8 Y 0 6 D7 PSin 2 Preset 3 D6 o Speed 5 D5 O esmas 3 D4 0 6 ES D3 Y T D2 O Fd 3 D1 o Tu 24 Q 24 O 24 O or NC disconnect switch Figure 20 Example of Connections for Seven Preset Speeds Active Low Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 91 Connections 92 5 7 Modbus Connection The WF2 drive supports Modbus communication The Modbus communication port is locat ed at the bottom of the I O board see Figure 6 on page 36 The pin out for this connection is shown in Figure 21 The Communication parameter group contains the parameters that configure the type of Modbus communication the description of the parameters starts on page 131 MB SIO MB SIO GND Figure 21 Pin out Diagram for the Modbus Connection TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Set up and Getting Started 6 Set up and Getting Started 6 1 Introduction The WF2 drive provides a comp
34. 5 Low Lim to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz 7 12 Torque Limits Group 98 This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the torque limits for the drive Limits may be set for both forward and reverse operation as well as for pulling a load mo toring or being pulled by a load regenerative Current Limit Address 0331 For some applications it is of benefit to limit the current output of the drive This parameter allows you to limit the current output by configuring the maximum motor current from the drive expressed as a percentage of nominal current rating Range 1 200 Default 15096 Trq Limit Type Address 0601 The WF2 drive provides a Torque Limit feature When this feature is enabled the drive s frequency is automatically reduced when operating in motoring mode to keep the measured torque within limits When operating in regenerative mode the output frequency may be au tomatically increased for the same reason TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Torque Limits Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Note that in addition to the torque limit parameters that activate the Torque Limit mode two additional torque limits are available These are Torque Level 1 and Torque Level 2 see page 119 and you may configure a digital output to become true when either of these limits is exceeded see page 117 for information on the parameters that configure the digital out
35. AI2 signal is lost Range 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 Hz Fan Loss Fault Address 0862 This parameter configures what action is taken if any when the drive senses the loss of one of its cooling fans either external or internal The following functions may be assigned TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 123 Parameters 124 Fault Management Group Display Function Disabled The drive does not take any action Warning A warning is generated but the drive continues to operate Fault A fault is generated and the drive stops 0 Range see table Default Warning OV Auto Reset Address 0865 When an overvoltage OV fault is detected this parameter configures whether the fault is automatically reset or whether a manual reset will be required If you select automatic resetting after a fault is detected the drive will stop and wait for the duration configured by Auto Reset Time see page 125 After pausing for the specified duration the drive will attempt to perform a ramp type or a catch on the fly start depending on the setting of the Auto Reset Strt parameter see page 125 If the attempt is unsuccessful the process of waiting and attempting a re start will re peat up to the number of attempts set by parameter Fault Lockout see page 125 Once the number of attempts is exceeded a manual reset and re start must be performed The following functions may b
36. Address 0156 D8 Status Read Only Address 0157 D9 Status Read Only Address 0158 D10 Status Read Only Address 0159 EN Status Read Only Address 0160 These eleven parameters show the status of the ten digital inputs and also the status of the enable circuit the circuit connected to the EN terminal Range Off or On Default A1 Level Read Only Address 0164 This parameter contains a value representing the measured input signal atthe A11 analog input 1 terminal as a percentage of the maximum input signal For example if A11 was configured to range from 0 to 10 V DC and the measured voltage was 2 V then this param eter would show 20 2 10 Range 100 100 Default A2 Level Read Only Address 0165 This parameter contains a value representing the measured input signal at the A21 analog input 2 terminal as a percentage of the maximum input signal For example if A21 was configured to range from 0 to 20 mA DC and the measured current was 15 mA then this parameter would show a value of 75 15 20 Range 0 100956 Default DQ1 Status Read Only Address 0167 DQ2 Status Read Only Address 0168 DQ3 Status Read Only Address 0169 R1 Status Read Only Address 0170 R2 Status Read Only Address 0171 These five parameters show the status of the three digital outputs and also the status of the two output relays Range Off or On Default AQ1 Level Read Only Address 0174
37. Calibrate 0276 0 105 100 121 AQA Offset 0277 0 10096 2096 121 AQB Configure 0279 Same as AQ1 Configure 121 AQB Calibrate 0280 0 105 100 121 AQB Offset 0281 0 10096 2096 121 Fault Management Group None 0 By DI 1 By Keypad 2 By Ser Lnk 3 Man Fault Reset 0864 By DI Kypd 4 By DI Kypd 122 By DI Ser Lnk 5 By Kypd Ser Lnk 6 By Dl Ser Kypd 7 Disabled 0 Input Phase Fit 0851 Fault 2 Fault 122 Disabled 0 External Fault 0853 Warning 1 Disabled 122 Fault 2 Disabled 0 Motor Thrm Prot 0854 Warning 1 Fault 123 Fault 2 No Action 0 Reference Fault 0859 Pelan ope T No Action 123 Preset Lvl 2 Fault 3 Loss Ref Freq 0860 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 Hz 123 Table 32 170 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting Disabled 0 Fan Loss Fault 0862 Warning 1 Warning 123 Fault 2 E Disabled 0 OV Auto Reset 0865 Enabled 1 Disabled 124 Disabled 0 OC Auto Reset 0867 Enabled 1 Disabled 124 E Disabled 0 OT Auto Reset 0868 Enabled 1 Disabled 124 Fault Lockout 0871 0 10 0 125 Auto Reset Time 0872 0 36000 s 600 s 125 Ramping 0 Auto Reset Strt 0874 Flying start 1 Ramping 125 Disabled 0 Net Timeout Flt 0876 Warning 1 Disabled 125 Fault 2 Disabled 0 DC Volt Fl
38. Current limit Adjustable from 1 to 200 of drive rating Speed ramps Primary alternate and jog 0 1 to 3200 s Voltage boost Adjustable O to 30 or auto boost Voltage characteristic Linear or Quadratic Timed overload Off or on adjustable inverse time trip 15 to 11096 of rated output for 10 1 or 2 1 speed range motors Non defeatable protective features Overcurrent overvoltage overtemperature ground fault short cir cuit Dynamic Brake overload Defeatable protective features Phase loss timed overload external fault broken wire loss of ref erence TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 13 Technical Characteristics 3 6 Dimensions Figure 1 Dimensions of 0 75 to 7 5 kW IP31 and IP55 Models KW A B C D E 0 75 1 5 313 7 155 7 168 1 280 2 81 3 2 2 3 7 313 7 155 7 196 9 280 2 81 3 5 5 7 5 313 7 233 7 213 4 280 2 81 3 Dimensions in mm 14 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08_GB 07 11 03 08 GB Technical Characteristics Figure 2 Dimensions of 11 to 55 0 kW IP31 and IP55 Models KW A B C D E F G 11 0 15 0 111 813 200 2 489 0 285 8 512 8 297 9 7 1 11 0 15 0 121 813 200 2 419 1 233 7 443 0 261 7 7 1 18 5 30 0 P1 81 3 200 2 489 0 285 8
39. Faults and Fault History displays lt SHIFT may be used in conjunction with the up or down arrow key to increase the scroll rate for parameter values This key the up arrow key is used in a variety of ways lt tincreases the speed of the drive when the keypad is the source for the speed reference lt It scrolls forward through a list of parameter groups or parameters within a group When the last group or parameter is highlighted it scrolls to the be ginning of the list The rate of scrolling may be increased by holding the key down for 5 s or pressing the SHIFT key along with the up arrow key When a parameter s value is shown it increases the value The scroll rate may be increased as described in the preceding bullet Whenalist of faults is displayed it moves from one fault to the next After the last fault is displayed it returns to the beginning This key the down arrow key is used in a variety of ways lt t decreases the speed of the drive when the keypad is the source for the speed reference e It scrolls backward through a list of parameter groups or parameters within a group When the first group or parameter is highlighted it scrolls to the end of the list The rate of scrolling may be increased by holding the key down for 5 s or pressing the SHIFT key along with the down arrow key When a parameter s value is shown it decreases the value The scroll rate may be increased as described in
40. High Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information In this example for 3 wire control when D4 is active jogging operations may occur The jog speed and ramp are enabled as set by the appropriate parameters While D4 is active pressing the Start pushbutton causes a ramp to the jogging reference speed and releasing the Start pushbutton causes the speed to go to zero using the jog ramp Note that if the jog input is opened returned to Run while Start is pressed the drive will ramp back to the normal reference speed without first stopping In the second type of jogging Pushbutton Jog a pushbutton is incorporated into the con trol scheme to initiate jogging Figure 11 on page 44 shows an example of this type of jog ging TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 43 Connections 44 TB4 TB4 CM CM ENI Y EN O D10 D10 D9 OQ D9 O D8 D8 O D7 2 D7 A D6 O 5 D6 5 D5 Jog g D5 O g D4 242 3 D4 94 D3 Y D3 D2 Run E D2 o Lo Stop E D1 os D1 Q Start s 24 Y 24 24 Y E 24 I oo l 24 or NC 24 or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 11 Example of Connections for the Pushbutton Jog Mode Forward Operation Only Active High Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration informat
41. Hz Default 60 00 Hz Nom Mtr RPM Address 0524 This parameter sets the nominal motor speed in revolutions per minute and is obtained from the nameplate of the motor attached to the drive It is important that this be entered accurately as it is used in sensorless vector control SVC calculations and in slip compen sation For 50 Hz mains the default is 1450 rpm For 60 Hz mains the default is 1760 rpm NOTE The proper setting of these values greatly influence the proper operation of the drive when in the SVC operating mode as well as the accuracy of overload protection Range 0 10000 RPM Default varies Mtr Ovid Scale Address 0611 This parameter injects a supplemental de rating factor into the overload calibration of the drive motor combination The value for this parameter should be left at its default value except when you wish to compensate for sensitive powertrain components such as plastic chain or where sensitive media may be stretched in an overload condition Range 0 0 100 0 Default 100 0 Mtr Ovid Time Address 0612 This parameter sets the amount of time that the measured motor current may exceed by 150 the threshold set by parameter Mtr Ovid Scale before an overload trip occurs TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Motor Setup Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters NOTE If the value of this parameter is set to 0 0 s this function is disabled If this parameter is se
42. Motor Curr Current being supplied to the motor 25096 of drive rating Out Torque Estimated torque 250 of motor nominal rating Out Volt Voltage being supplied to the motor Rated motor voltage Out Power Calculated power output of the drive 25096 of drive rating Out Freq Output frequency of the drive Parameter Maximum Freq Ref Freq Commanded frequency 10096 of the input configuration Motor Temp Calculation of the motor s temperature 250 of motor model PID Fback The percentage of PID feedback 10096 of maximum feedback 0 Range see AQ1 Configure Range see table Default Motor Spd AQ1 Calibrate Address 0791 This parameter is used to calibrate the output being sent from analog output 1 terminal AO For example configuring this parameter to 100 equals a 10 V full scale Range 0 105 Default 100 AQ2 Configure Address 0792 This parameter configures what variable governs the output of analog output 2 terminal A1 The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those for AQ1 Configure Default Out Torque TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Analog Outputs Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters AQ2 Calibrate Address 0793 This parameter is used to calibrate the output being sent from analog output 2 terminal A1 For example configuring this parameter to 100 equals a 10 V full scale R
43. Only Address 0282 These parameters contain a value representing the measured voltage at the A B or C ter minal of the Analog Input Output Option Board as a percentage of the maximum output volt age For example if this parameter showed 70 then the voltage being output at terminal AQB would be 7 V DC 70 of 10 V DC the maximum value Range 0 100 Default RA Status Read Only Address 0285 RB Status Read Only Address 0286 These parameters show the status of the two output relays found on the Analog Input Out put Option Board Range Off or On Default 7 7 Control Modes Group 07 11 03 08 GB This parameter group contains parameters that configure how the drive is controlled 2 Wire 3 Wire Address 0401 This parameter allows you to select whether 2 wire or 3 wire control will be used See page 40 for more information on 2 wire and 3 wire control including sample connection diagrams Note that if 3 wire control is selected digital input D2 is forced to act as a Stop input it can not be configured to perform another function See page 110 for more information on con figuring the functionality of D2 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 83 Parameters 84 Control Modes Group Display Function 2 Wire 2 wire control is utilized 3 Wire 3 wire control is utilized 0 Range see ta
44. Page 151 Page 151 Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Go Next Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Page 152 Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Goto X Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Page 153 Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Al Low Thres 1 Thres 2 Thres 3 Thres 4 Thres 5 Thres 6 Thres 7 Thres 8 Thres 9 Thres 10 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Page 154 Al High Al High Al High AI High AI High AI High AI High AI High AI High AI High Thres 1 Thres 2 Thres 3 Thres 4 Thres 5 Thres 6 Thres 7 Thres 8 Thres 9 Thres 10 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 X Step 1 X Step 2 X Step 3 X Step 4 X Step 5 X Step 6 X Step 7 X Step 8 X Step 9 X Step 10 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Page 155 Figure 33 Seq Configure Parameters 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 159 Summary of WF2 Parameters
45. Safety Switches lille 27 5 2 5 Considerations for Control Wiring llis 28 5 3 Input Line Requirements o oocccocc RR Rm hn 30 5 3 1 Line Voltage oc eed ie pa e A A yeaa Aia died 4 30 5 3 2 FING CAPAC eros a aa Sindh Tells a a 30 5 3 3 Use of Isolation Transformers and Line Reactors ae 31 5 3 4 Phase Imbalance wa nt aba ra da a DP e HORRORE a a 31 5 3 5 Power System Configuration ees 31 5 4 Terminals Found on the WF2 Power Board a cece eee eee eens 31 5 4 1 Description of the TerMinalS oooocococccococ RR m Ih 31 5 4 2 Typical Power Connections cette eee 32 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Table of Contents 5 5 Dynamic Braking testa aie a LIII A a Be a E A da ET 34 5 5 1 Dynamic Braking Units ooooocoocccoccc e TANE 35 5 5 2 User Supplied External Resistor llli 35 5 6 Terminals Found on the WF2 Control Board 1 2 2 0 0c cette 36 5 6 1 Description of the Control Terminals 00 0 cee ee 36 5 6 2 Configuring the Type and Range of Analog Inputs 0 0 0 cece eee 38 5 6 3 Control Wiring Connections Active High Logic 0 20 c cee eee 40 5 6 4 Control Wiring Connections Active Low Logic lisse 48 5 7 Modbus Connection hh rre 52 6 Set up and Getting Started oo 53 6 1 NtrOCUCHION P DE 53 6 2 Descr
46. Selection of 50 ohm input impedance may be best depending on the characteristics of the device connected to the WF2 drive TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Connections The settings of the switches in the SW1 DIP switch bank depend on the PC number listed on the input output board For input output boards labeled PC587 PC687 or PC762 the SW1 DIP switch bank has eight DIP switches SW1 1 to SW1 8 Use the settings shown in table 18 on page 39 to configure this version of the SW1 DIP switch bank For input output boards labeled PC653 or PC655 the SW1 DIP switch bank has six DIP switches SW1 1 to SW1 6 Use the settings shown in table 19 on page 40 to configure this version of the SW1 DIP switch bank If you are unsure about the type of board consult BERGES before setting the DIP switches 25 V DC Active in Pull down Logic Mode Digital Dx Input Common CM Input Figure 7 Typical Digital Input Configuration Type of Input Signal Syy4 4 sw4 5 SW1 3 SW1 4 SW1 5 SW1 6 SW1 7 SW1 8 and Range Analog Input 1 0 to 10 V DC 10 kQ On On Off Off On On 0 to 5 V DC 10 kQ Of On Off Off On Off 10 V DC 10 kQ On On Off Off On On 0 4 to 20 mA DC 50 Q Off Off On Off Off Off 0 4 to 20 mA DC 250 Q Off On Off On On Off Analog Input 2 0 to 10 V DC 10 kQ Off Off 0 to 5 V DC
47. Step 3 3060 EN 3 3 X Step 4 3080 p X Step 5 3100 Siep4 4 Step 5 5 Disabled 155 X Step 6 3120 Step 6 6 X Step 7 3140 Step 7 7 X Step 8 3160 p Step 8 8 X Step 9 3180 Step 9 9 X Step 10 3200 Step 10 1 Ungrouped Parameters Drive Family 0998 0 10 Read Only 139 Fault History 1 0100 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 2 0101 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 3 0102 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 4 0103 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 5 0104 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 6 0105 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 7 0106 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 8 0107 0 100 Read Only 139 Fault History 9 0108 0 100 Read Only 139 Active Fault 1 0110 0 100 Read Only 140 Active Fault 2 0111 0 100 Read Only 140 Active Fault 3 0112 0 100 Read Only 140 Active Fault 4 0113 0 100 Read Only 140 Active Fault 5 0114 0 100 Read Only 140 Active Fault 6 0115 0 100 Read Only 140 Table 32 178 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 12 Hexadecimal to Binary Conversion 07 11 03 08 GB Hexadecimal to Binary Conversion The WF2 drive utilizes hexadecimal numbers to display and store the binary values of some parameters These parameters are read and written as four digit hexadecimal values The hexadecimal values are then translated to binary values with the binary values being com pared to the key provided for each parameter to determine what status is shown or what
48. T2 V T3 W These terminals are for motor connections Table 12 Description of WF2 Power Terminals 1 The sixth terminal from the left is labeled B on 230 V AC models of 15 kW or less WF2K2S00 7x WF2K2S02 2x and WF2K2000 7x WF2K2015 0x as well as 460 V AC and 575 V AC models of 30 kW or less WF2K4000 7x WF2K4030 0x and WF2K5000 7x WF2K5030 0x On the remaining larger horsepower models this terminal is labeled DB1 The function of the terminal does not change Internal DB Resistor Figure 4 WF2 Power Terminals 5 4 2 Typical Power Connections 32 WF2 Drive r GND L1 R L2 S L3 T T1 U T2N T3 W GND Disconnect m Switch O E Fuses AC Power Three Phase Figure 5 Connections for Power Wiring TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Connections Figure 5 shows the terminal connections for line power and motor output See section 5 3 starting on page 30 for input line requirements Note that when testing for a ground fault do not short any motor lead T1 U T2 V or T3 W back to an input phase L1 R L2 S or L3 T As shown in figure 5 it is necessary to provide fuses and a disconnect switch for the input AC line in accordance with all applicable electrical codes The WF2 drive is
49. VIt defin ing the point on the theoretical curve where boost ceases Parameter Slip Comp is set to None but may be changed to Automatic Range see table Default CT V Hz 2pc 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 1 01 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters Drive Output Group Carrier Freq Address 0501 This parameter configures the switching or carrier frequency for the drive Lower frequen cies produce better torque but produce more audible noise from the motor Higher switch ing frequencies produce less audible noise but cause more heating in the drive and motor The factory default setting for a particular model is the frequency rated to produce continu ous full load current within rated temperatures 0 Range 1 0 16 0 kHz Default varies Auto Carrier Address 0502 This parameter allows you to enable or disable the auto carrier feature When enabled the setting of the Carrier Freq parameter is ignored Instead the drive uses the optimum switching frequency which is the highest frequency for the load that does not cause over heating Display Function Disabled Function auto carrier is disabled Enabled Function auto carrier is enabled 0 Range see table Default Disabled Slip Comp Address 0551 This parameter sets the amount of slip compensation which may provide more constant motor speed under changing load conditions The following functions may
50. Watch Dog Trip Contact BERGES for further information Contact BERGES for further information 02 Power Bridge ld lt Ribbon cable not correctly seated be e Ensure thatthe ribbon cable is correctly tween the power and control boards seated Electrical noise Determine the source of the noise and eliminate it 03 Current Calibr Current sensors have an offset problem Contact BERGES for further information 04 ITSP 24V Supply Overloaded 24 V DC supply Check the loading on the 24 V DC supply and remove any excess load 05 IDC Volt Calibr DC voltage is outside of normal limits on Check line voltage power up This may be caused by lt Check the Supply Voltage parameter lt High or low line voltage see page 106 Supply Voltage parameter incorrectly set 06 IOC Trip Output short circuit May also be caused e Check motor wiring by a ground fault see Fault Code 11 be e Extend acceleration ramp low Reduce boost e Check for ground faults 07 ExtFIt Warning The configured input sensed an external Investigate why the external fault occurred Fault fault and correct 09 Inter Proc Comm Loss of communication with the control Reset the drive by pressing the Stop key terminal strip for more than 1 second If problem per sists consult BERGES 11 Ground Fault The drive detected that the sum of the mo Check motor wiring tor phases current is not zero This may e Check for and remove any capacitive b
51. Word 3 0052 0 65535 Read Only 135 PID Configure Group No PID 0 Feed Fwd 1 F fwd DI 2 F fwd Fkey 3 PID Configure 0650 F fwd Ser 4 No PID 136 Full Range 5 Full DI 6 Full Fkey 7 Full Ser 8 Direct 0 PID Direct Type 0651 Reverse 1 Direct 136 Ref 1 0 Feedback Config 0652 Ref 2 1 Ref 1 136 Ref 3 2 PID Prop Gain 0653 0 2000 0 137 PID Int Gain 0654 0 10000 0 137 PID Deriv Gain 0655 0 1000 0 137 Feedback Gain 0656 0 2000 0 137 PID High Limit 0657 0 00 100 00 100 00 137 Table 32 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 173 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting PID Low Limit 0658 0 00 100 00 0 00 137 PID High Alarm 0659 0 00 100 00 100 00 138 PID Low Alarm 0660 0 00 100 00 0 00 138 PID Reference 0670 0 100 Read Only 138 PID Feedback 0671 0 100 0 138 PID Error 0672 0 100 Read Only 138 PID Output 0673 0 100 Read Only 138 PID P Part 0674 0 100 Read Only 138 PID I Part 0675 0 100 Read Only 139 PID D Part 0676 0 100 Read Only 139 Seq Configure Group Disabled 0 Always 1 Seq Enable 3000 By DI 2 Disabled 148 By F key 3 By Ser Lnk 4 Keypad 0 Seq Run Source 3001 Term Strip 1 Keypad 149 Disabled 0 By DI 1 Seq Pause 3004 By F key 2 Disabled 149 By Ser Lnk 3 Disabled 0 By DI 1 E Seq Res
52. a switchgear cabinet and for permanent connection To guarantee lasting operating safety and reliability the inverter must be connected expert ly in accordance with the valid electrical standards Attention must be paid to good insula tion from earth potential on the power terminals An AC system with a nominal voltage of 230 V 50 60 Hz must be connected to line termi nals L1 R N and PE or a three phase system with a nominal voltage of 400 V 50 60 Hz to terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T and PE pay attention to rating plate The neutral point must be earthed TN C system Ensure a voltage balanced to earth or phase to phase when feeding in the line power through an isolating transformer star point must be earthed The inverter will be destroyed if the line feeder is confused with the motor cable The DC link capacitors must be reformed if the inverter you wish to connect has been out of operation for more than a year To do this connect the inverter to voltage for approx 30 minutes The inverter should not be loaded by connected motors during forming of Fault Current Safety Switches Owing to leakage currents from anti interference capacitors in the inverter and the motor lines as well as due to d c components in the supply current the protective function of a fault current safety switch can no longer be guaranteed this also applies to Fl safety switch es that are AC DC sensitive All devices connected to such safety switches a
53. and 115 for more information on these parameters Range Minimum Freq to 320 Hz Default 60 Hz Main Speed Ref Address 0800 This parameter configures the reference speed for the drive The reference speed results from inputs on the analog input terminals A11 A12 and A21 and how parameters Ref1 Config Ref2 Config and Ref3 Config are set see page 90 for more information about these three parameters Display Function Spd Hf 1 Reference 1 Spd Rf 2 Reference 2 Spd Rf 3 Reference 3 Spd R1 R2 The summation of references 1 and 2 Spd R1 R3 The summation of references 1 and 3 S R1 R2 R3 The summation of all references Spd R2 R3 The summation of references 2 and 3 S R14k R2 Reference 2 is scaled by factor k and then summed with reference 1 The value of k is set by parameter Set k Factor see page 92 Spd R1 R2 The difference between references 1 and 2 Spd R2 R1 The difference between references 2 and 1 Spd R1 R3 The difference between references 1 and 3 Spd R3 R1 The difference between references 3 and 1 Spd R2 R3 The difference between references 2 and 3 Spd R3 R2 The difference between references 3 and 2 S R1 R2 R3 The summation of references 1 and 2 less reference 3 S R1 R3 R2 The summation of references 1 and 3 less reference 2 Spd Fixed The speed reference is constant and is set by parameter Set Fixed Speed see page 91 The spe
54. and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 Drive Load Motor Temp Output Power Motor RPM Out Torque Nm FLTD ARP NOEN NRDY RDY OVRV LO V CLIM keypad display window TLIM third line second line Y first line RDY 10 00Hz KYP i DECL DCI Output KSTP Frequency LSL COF MLOS KST KYP Set up and Getting Started Status of the Drive Listed in order from highest to lowest priority if more than one status is active the higher priority status is displayed Drive is faulted A fault occurred that may be auto reset No drive enable at the terminal strip Drive is not ready drive enable active Drive is ready drive enable active An overvoltage condition exists An undervoltage condition exists Drive is in Current Limit Drive is in Torque Limit A high current condition exists High temperature warning Drive is in jogging mode Zero speed Run command present but no reference Drive is accelerating Drive is decelerating Drive running Forward at speed Drive running Reverse at speed DC injection braking is active Drive stopped from the keypad when terminal strip control source Line start lockout Catch on the fly start in progress Line power has been interrupted to control 3 Letter Code for Control Path Keypad sets ref frequency drive control via terminal strip Keypad if Loc
55. bit 11 of parameter Cntl Word 1 to 0 or 1 When bit 11 is set to 0 the control path is the keypad when bit 11 is set to 1 the terminal strip is the control path The setting of parameter Terminal Keypad may be overridden which allows the serial link to be used to select the control path This is accomplished by writing to bits 0 and 1 of pa rameter Cntl Word 1 As described on page 133 where parameter Cntl Word 1 is described Bit 0 determines how the control path for start stop commands is selected When the bit is set to 0 the con trol path for start stop commands is selected using the means set by parameter Terminal Keypad When the bit is set to 1 the control path for start stop commands is the serial link Similarly Bit 1 determines how the control path for the reference frequency is selected When the bit is set to 0 the control path for the reference frequency is selected using the means set by parameter Terminal Keypad When the bit is set to 1 the control path for the reference frequency is the serial link If only one of the two bits is set to 1 the Operate display will show SLP to denote that the serial link is only partially the control path If both bits are set to 1 the Operate display will show SLC to denote that the serial link is entirely the control path Note that you may temporarily halt serial link control by configuring a digital input to perform the SLO serial link override function When the configured digit
56. configuring parameter A1 Configure see page 113 The input signal may be 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 5 V DC 10 V DC 0 to 20 mA DC or 4 to 20 mA DC These input signals provide speed references DIP switch bank SW1 on the I O board selects the type of input signal see table 18 on page 39 for information on setting the DIP switch If a 0 to 20 mA DC input signal is configured the burden may be set to either 50 Q or 250 O via the DIP switch The 50 Q setting is intended for current loop applications where multiple drives are chained together in series on one analog current reference A potentiometer with a minimum value of 1 kQ may be used for this input 10 A21 This terminal is the reference supply for a potentiometer used in conjunc tion with A1 or A2 The supply voltage is 10 V DC with a maximum current capacity of 10 mA This terminal is Analog Input 2 It is single ended and so the other lead from the circuit must be connected to a CM terminal The input range is con figured with parameter A2 Configure see page 114 and may be an ana log input or a pulse train up to 100 kHz The default setting for this input is Normal This terminal may also be used as a Pulse Train Input function This signal may be an external pulse tach signal or it may be the DPQ signal from an other WF2 drive or WFC inverter A pull up 4 7 kQ 0 5 W resistor may need to be connected between the A2 and 10 terminals for a signal from a WFC inverter
57. drive A particular speed is selected by the combination of inputs on the terminals assigned to the preset speeds Tables 20 21 and 22 on page 46 show what speeds are selected by an input combination depending on the number of digital inputs used TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 45 Connections 46 TB4 CM EN D10 Q D9 O PSInsH D8 Y oo D7 Psin 2 deser 2 D6 pac Speed 8 D5 psingg Ps a D4 0 6 D3 Run E D2 O Forward i D1 oo 24 Q 24 O 24 Q or NC disconnect switch Figure 13 Example of Connections for Seven Preset Speeds Active High Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information For commanding preset speeds via serial communication the speeds are selected much as when three digital inputs are configured A combination of on and off states 1s and Os of bits 5 6 and 7 of Cntl Word 1 determine the active preset speed Table 23 on page 47 shows how the settings of the bits combine to select an active preset speed Note that if fewer than seven preset speeds are desired you do not need to set all three preset speed bits By leaving one or two of the bits in its default state of 0 and only varying the value of the other two or one bits fewer preset speeds could be commanded For example table 23 on page 47 shows that if bit 7 remained at O while serial commu
58. either the keypad or the terminal strip and this assignment cannot be altered except by re configuring the Terminal Keypad parameter The remaining functions that may be configured for the Terminal Keypad parameter permit greater flexibility by allowing you to select the control path on the fly These functions es sentially configure a switch to select whether the keypad or the terminal strip is the control path Note that this is an either or selection you cannot configure mixed modes as with the two settings described earlier TS C KP R and KP C TS R The last three functions that may be assigned to the Terminal Keypad parameter are TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Set up and Getting Started T K by DI A digital input is configured to switch between the keypad as the source for both the reference frequency and start stop commands and inputs to the terminal strip as the source for both the reference frequency and start stop commands When the digital input is open or false the control path is the keypad when the digital input is closed or true the terminal strip is the con trol path T K by Fkey A function key on the enhanced keypad is configured to switch the control path between the keypad and the terminal strip see parameters F1 Key Config through F4 Key Config on page 129 for more information T K by SerL nk Serial communication is used to set
59. for temperature humidity and maximum vibration limits Do not mount the drive near heat radiating elements or in direct sunlight Mount the drive vertically and do not restrict the air flow to the heat sink fins The drive generates heat Allow sufficient space around the unit for heat dissipation 4 3 Considerations for Mounting IP31 and IP55 Models in Host Enclosures HINT 18 This section only applies to IP31 and IP55 models it does not apply to IP66 NSF BISSC certified models The WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive is available from stock in a variety of enclosures that meet the requirements of almost any application Yet special applications such as use in washdown environments or in integrated systems may make it desirable to mount WF2 drives in a host enclosure When WF2 drives are mounted in a host enclosure the watts dissipated by the drives must be dissipated by the host enclosure If this is not accomplished the control circuitry of the WF2 drives will be damaged Two techniques are available for mounting WF2 drives in a host enclosure The drives may be entirely enclosed in the host enclosure or TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB 4 3 1 4 3 2 IP31 IP31 Installation The drives may be mounted with their cooling fins outside of the host enclosure The following sections discuss these two mounting techniques in greater detail and I
60. including a combination between time duration and digital input or function key The following sections describe the modifications that occur when parameter Application is set to Sequencer 10 2 Parameters Modified by the Application 10 2 1 Parameters No Longer Available When the Sequencer application is loaded the following WF2 functions and parameters are no longer supported Local Remote modes parameters Local Remote Local Config and Remote Config Further all data values for switching between Local and Remote modes for example L R Switch for parameter D2 Configure are unavailable lt EMOP operation parameters EMOP Config and EMOP Ramp Time Further all data values for EMOP operation for example EMOP Spd for parameter D3 Configure are unavailable The third fourth and fifth skip frequency bands parameters Skip 3 Low Lim Skip 3 Hi Lim Skip 4 Low Lim Skip 4 Hi Lim Skip 5 Low Lim and Skip 5 Hi Lim lt Configurability of alternate acceleration and deceleration ramps the AR1 and AR2 ramps are forced to be linear with no S rounding parameters AR1 Ramp Type AR1 S Rounding AR2 Ramp Type and AR2 S Rounding TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 146 Sequencer Application Configurability of the D2 D3 D4 and D5 digital inputs D2 is set as Stop D3 is set as Seq Enable D4 is set as Seq Run and D5 is set as Seq Reset parameters D2 Con figure D3 Con
61. is 0000 0000 0001 0011 Only the ones are important and these are found in bit positions 4 1 and 0 As shown by the key for Cntl Word 1 the serial link is the control path for control functions and the reference speed bits O and 1 and the value of parameter Ext Freq Ref 2 is the reference speed bit 4 The parameters in this group are shown in the order in which they are displayed on the key pad See page 52 for the pin out diagram for the Modbus communication port Comm Protocol Address 0900 This parameter determines whether RTU or ASCII Modbus protocol will be used for serial link communications or whether the DeviceNet protocol will be used If set to DeviceNet Siemens P1 or Metasys N2 internal set up of the respective option board automatically oc curs Range RTU ASCII DeviceNet Siemens P1 Metasys N2 Default RTU Comm Baudrate Address 0901 This parameter sets the baud rate for serial communication The following baud rates may be assigned TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 131 Parameters 132 Communication Group Display Function Disabled Serial communication is not being utilized 1200 1200 bps 1 2400 2400 bps 1 4800 4800 bps 1 9600 9600 bps default for Modbus communication 1 19 2K 19 2K bps H 38 4K 38 4K bps 2 125K 125k bps I default for DeviceNet communication 2 250K 250K bps 2 500K 500K bps l
62. is 1 and so it does not need to be altered for this example Range 1 32767 Default 1 User Units Div Address 0957 This parameter may be used in creating a custom unit that is displayed on the keypad The displayed frequency is divided by the value stored in this parameter Range 1 32767 Default 1 User Label 1 Address 0958 User Label 2 Address 0959 User Label 3 Address 0960 The custom unit created with the above parameters may have a three character label ap plied to it These three parameters specify the first through the third characters respective ly A character is selected by using the Up or Down arrow keys to scroll to the desired char acter and then pressing ENTER The characters supported by the WF2 drive are upper and lower case A through Z 0 through 9 blank space and 96 amp When using serial communication the data codes for these characters are as follows A Z 0 26 a z 27 52 0 9 53 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 lt 70 71 gt 72 _ 73 75 O 76 77 amp 78 Range Default O space Language Address 0980 This parameter sets the language used for displays The following languages may be as signed to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Display Options Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Display Function English Displays
63. marking Observance of the limit values required by EMC law is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the in stallation or machine 6 Operation The components of the power section and certain elements of the control section are con nected to the line voltage when the drive converter is connected to the line voltage Touch ing these components involves mortal danger Always isolate the drive converter from the line supply before performing any work on the electrical or mechanical part of the system Disconnect the drive converter from the line voltage before removing the terminal cover or the housing e g by removing or deactivating on site fuses or by deactivating a master switch isolating all poles etc After disconnection of the drive converters from the voltage supply live appliance parts and power terminals must not be touched immediately because of possibly energized capaci tors In this respect the corresponding signs and markings on the drive converter must be respected After switching off the line voltage wait for at least 5 minutes before beginning work on or in the drive converter Disconnect all power before servicing the drive Then measure the DC bus capacitor charge between the B and B terminals or DB1 and B terminals depending on model see page 31 for more information to verify that the DC volt age is less than 45 V DC The DC Bus LED is not a definitive indication of the absence of DC voltage In the event
64. of the conductor skin effect braided copper tapes of corresponding cross section should be used TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 23 24 Housing wall earth Remove any paint or varnish Large area contacting of the cable shield Motor cable with braided shield The inverter and all other components used for interference suppression especially also the shield of the motor cable should be contacted over as large an area as possible when connected to metal control panels switchgear cabinets and similar skin effect Remove the paint at the respective areas to ensure good contacting over a large area A central earthing point should be used for interference suppression e g equipotential bonding strip or centrally at an interference suppression filter The earthing lines are routed to the respective terminals radially from this point Conductor loops of the earthing lines are impermissible and can lead to unnecessary interference The shield cross section must not be reduced when the shield is connected to continuing lines This would give rise to RF resistance at a cross section reduction and the resulting RF energy would consequently not be discharged but radiated Shields particularly shields of control lines must not be contacted through pin contacts of plug connectors In these cases the metallic hand guard of the plug connector should be used for large area connection of
65. of the system is solely liable for damage resulting from improper use of the drive converter Only items expressly approved by BERGES e g line filter choke external braking chop pers and braking resistors etc may be used as accessories The installer of the system is liable for any damage resulting from the use of accessories that have not been approved expressly by BERGES Please consult us in case of doubt In case of installation in machinery commissioning of the drive converters i e the starting of normal operation is prohibited until the machinery has been proved to conform to the provisions of the directive 89 392 EEC Machinery Safety Directive MSD Account is to be taken of EN 60204 Commissioning i e the starting of normal operation is admissible only where conformity with the EMC directive 89 336 EEC has been established The drive converters meet the requirements of the low voltage directive 73 23 EEC They are subject to the harmonized standards of the series prEN 50178 DIN VDE 0160 in con junction with EN 60439 1 DIN VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146 DIN VDE 0558 The technical data as well as information concerning the supply conditions shall be taken from the name plate and from the documentation and shall be strictly observed TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 3 Transport Storage The instructions for transport storage and proper use shall be complied with Damage est
66. parameter Display Function Main Ramps Parameters Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 AR1 Parameters Accel Time 2 and Decel Time 2 Alternate Ramp 1 AR2 Parameter Accel Time 3 Decel Time 3 Alternate Ramp 2 AR3 Parameter Acc Dec Time 4 Alternate Ramp 3 AR4 Parameter Acc Dec Time 5 Alternate Ramp 4 Range see table Default Main Ramps TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 151 Sequencer Application 152 Seg Configure Group Go Next Step n Address See chapter 11 This parameter configures the condition that will cause the Sequencer application to move from step n to the next step The following conditions may be assigned to this parameter Display Condition Causing Advancement to Step n 1 Disabled The Sequencer application does not advance DI6 Digital input D6 Parameter D6 Configure must also be set to Step Change DI7 Digital input D7 Parameter D7 Configure must also be set to Step Change DIS Digital input D8 Parameter D8 Configure must also be set to Step Change Dig Digital input D9 Parameter D9 Configure must also be set to Step Change DI10 Digital input D10 Parameter D10 Configure must also be set to Step Change The frequency input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in pa Al1 Low rameter Al Low Thres n AI Hiah The frequency input to analog input 1 goes a
67. parameter configures the duration of the pulse at start up Note that motor RS is not calculated if the value of this parameter is less than 1 s Range 0 00 25 00 s Default 1 00 s SVC Lo Spd Comp Address 0542 This parameter provides a compensating factor to enable the drive to more accurately per form sensorless vector control SVC at low speeds NOTE The proper setting of these values greatly influence the proper operation of the drive when in the SVC operating mode as well as the accuracy of overload protection Range 0 1280 Default 256 Motor Type Address 0610 This parameter configures what type of motor is attached to the WF2 drive This is used for modeling thermal performance which determines when the drive will trip due to motor over loading The following data codes may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 105 Parameters Braking Options Group Display Function No Thermal Prot The motor overload trip is disabled Std Induction The attached motor is a standard induction self cooled motor Blower Cooled The attached motor uses a constant speed fan for forced cooling 0 Range see table Default No Thermal Prot Supply Voltage Address 0549 This parameter configures the supply voltage Only the following values may be assigned to this parameter the value in parentheses is the data code for serial communicati
68. parameters work together to display the number of hours that the WF2 drive has been operating When this parameter is read from a keypad the display will show the number of hours properly formatted However when the parameter is read via serial com munication you must also read parameter Runtime Format to properly format the value To format the value divide the value shown for parameter Elapsed Runtime by 1 if parameter Runtime Format is 50 10if parameter Runtime Format is 51 or 100 if parameter Runtime Format is 52 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Input Status Group Parameters The Elapsed Runtime parameter s value may be reset by setting parameter Program Number to 10 Range 0 65535 Elapsed Runtime Default Range 50 51 or 52 Runtime Format Default MWh Lifetime Read Only Address 0894 MWh Life Format Read Only Address 0895 These parameters work together to display the amount of power that the WF2 drive has consumed over its lifetime When this parameter is read from a keypad the display will show the amount of power consumed properly formatted However when the parameter is read via serial communication you must also read parameter MWh Life Format to properly format the value To format the value divide the value shown for parameter MWh Lifetime by 10 if parameter MWh Life Format is 51 100 if parameter MWh Life Format is 52 or 1000 if parameter MWh Lif
69. provided that the Sequencer application is not turned on If the Sequencer application is turned on D5 is set to Seq Reset and cannot be changed Range see D3 Configure Default Jog Revers D6 Configure Address 0708 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D6 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to param eter D3 Configure When the Sequencer application is loaded the function Step Chg is al so available Range see D3 Configure Default PS In 1 D7 Configure Address 0709 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D7 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to param eter D3 Configure When the Sequencer application is loaded the function Step Chg is al so available Range see D3 Configure Default PS In 42 D8 Configure Address 0710 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D8 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to param eter D3 Configure When the Sequencer application is loaded the function Step Chg is al so available Range see D3 Configure Default PS In 3 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Analog Inputs Group Parameters D9 Configure Address 0711 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D
70. r rers Sen see a e RU E ed RE LIS RETE LIE RUE 17 4 Installation eR ar b head ue der yee Red edet 18 4 1 Preliminary Inspection oa us cete pee bb bm Y eR RR bole ORE DOE e Ratis 18 4 2 Installation Precautions hr 18 4 3 Considerations for Mounting IP31 and IP55 Models in Host Enclosures 18 4 3 1 IP31 and IP55 Models Entirely Enclosed in the Host Enclosure 19 4 3 2 IP31 and IP55 Models with Fins External to the Host Enclosure 19 4 4 Maintenance Environmental Integrity llle III 21 4 4 1 Removal of the Conduit Plate on NEMA 1 IP31 Models lille esses 21 4 4 2 Minimum Torque Values to Secure Cover 0 000 cece aaa ae 22 4 5 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility ssillelee RII 22 4 5 1 Limit Glasses 5 25 ns oett te ead Dad e C WR RR xr DATA Rab s 22 4 5 2 Interference Suppression Measures llle ees 23 4 5 3 EMC Ordinance EMC Directive 89 336 EEC 0002 cece eee ee 25 5 Connections i xor apr ER hens ieu X vei DEP a Goria Solera 26 5 1 IntrOQUCllOr una mE DROP RH NOE eC OEC UU DUMONT GR ED EU Me dub quA 26 5 2 General Wiring Information a s mm 26 5 2 1 Wining Practices os reg EP A PRG E NUM PISO E EE 26 5 2 2 Considerations for Power Wiring and Motor Lead Length ooocccccccoo o 26 5 2 3 Line Power CONNECHON oooooooo eet eee ene 27 5 2 4 Use of Fault Current
71. rameter that configures the operation of the actual function key to be By F key E used for turning the Sequencer application on or off must be set appro priately see page 129 for more information By Ser Lnk Turned on by setting Bit 0 of Cntl Word 2 to 1 via the serial link 0 Range see table Default Disabled Seq Run Source Address 3001 Once the Sequencer application is turned on this parameter determines the means by which the application is run The following may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Keypad Input from the keypad Term Strip Input from the terminal strip NOTE Parameter Cntl Word 2 see page 134 which may be used to enable and control the Sequencer application via the serial link takes precedence over the setting of this pa rameter Range see table Default Keypad Seq Pause Address 3004 This parameter determines the means by which the Sequencer application may be stopped at a particular step The following may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled Disabled the Sequencer application cannot be paused Bv DI Digital input D4 which is hard coded for this function a different digital y input cannot be used instead of D4 A function key on the enhanced keypad The parameter that configures the operation of the actual function key to be used to pause the Se By F key Sun quencer application must be set approp
72. same as those that may be assigned to parameter DQ1 Configure see page 117 for the available functions Range see DQ1 Configure Default At Speed DQ3 Configure Address 0772 This parameter configures what action or state causes digital output 3 terminal DQ3 to be come active true The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to parameter DQ1 Configure see page 117 for the available functions Range see DQ1 Configure Default Run Rev R1 Configure Address 0780 This parameter configures what action or state causes output relay 1 terminals RC1 NC1 NO1 to become active The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to parameter DQ1 Configure see page 117 for the availa ble functions Range see DQ1 Configure Default Drv Flted R2 Configure Address 0781 This parameter configures what action or state causes output relay 2 terminals RC2 NC2 NO2 to become active The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to parameter DQ1 Configure see page 117 for the availa ble functions Range see DQ1 Configure Default Drive Run DPQ Scaling Address 0789 This parameter selects the multiplier that is used to determine the output frequency at the DPQ terminal see figure 6 on page 36 The DPQ output is the product of the drive s fre quency and the value of this parameter
73. surfaces In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers of improper use wrong installation or maloperation there is the danger of serious personal injury and damage to property For further information see documentation All operations serving transport installation and commissioning as well as maintenance are to be carried out by skilled technical personnel Observe IEC 364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and national accident prevention rules For the purposes of these basic safety instructions skilled technical personnel means per sons who are familiar with the installation mounting commissioning and operation of the product and have the qualifications needed for the performance of their functions We draw attention to the fact that no liability can be assumed for damage and malfunctions resulting from failure to observe the operating manual We draw attention to the fact that no liability can be assumed for damage and malfunctions resulting from failure to observe the operating manual 2 Intended Use The application of the drive converter described in this operating manual exclusively serves the purpose of continuously variable speed control of three phase motors Drive converters are components designed for inclusion in electrical installations or machin ery The drive converters are designed for installation in a switchgear cabinet and for permanent connection The operator
74. tee eee 120 7 20 Fault Management Group a hr rr 122 7 21 Display Options Groups iuo pa ged Reo IPEA wee E a a REGNO Ring 127 122 Special GroUp oic ee ein De E A s UR RA ROUGE t o dele m LE 130 7 23 Communication GI0Up hr 131 24 PID Contigure Group uc va a o ERREUR ae da LEN PD ere 135 7 25 Ungrouped Parameters o o o o oooccoc e hh rn 139 8 Troubleshooting eee et me e bd e Ye p n n e E rs d 141 8 1 WEF2 Fault GOd6s c nerd a v eui kane a pre D eld S Or wand eg whan 141 9 WEZ Options ee cxx e eh Irene eR ER er ee EIS i MI eee aide A CRUS DEUS ad 145 9 1 Remote Keypad Kits oooocoococconooo lh hh hne 145 9 2 IP31 IP21 Conversion Kisi si aa a gak AENG gak RR m rh 145 9 3 SIOCO 2 Serial Port Converter aaa aaa aaa aa aa aa aaa 145 9 4 Reflash TOOL t toe ee Di A AR oett ye iden AS Er a 145 9 5 Dynamic Braking Units x i obs aa rr E ee hah ERA A ERR Rd a YO RIA AIR eR RR RB 145 9 6 DeviceNet Option Board o ooococcoo hn 145 9 7 Analog Input Output Option Board oooocccccccc n 145 10 SequencerApplication essre aa ag AD A X yere EA Ec Ree 146 10 1 iioii E EE 146 10 2 Parameters Modified by the Application llle 146 10 2 1 Parameters No Longer Available oooooocccococcnornna eee 146 10 2 2 Parameters With Changed Functionality llle amooo 147 10 3 Parameters Added by the Application 147 10 3
75. the DeviceNet option Consult BERGES for more information on the Siemens P1 and Metasys N2 options The communication interface is RS485 and allows up to 247 slaves to be connected to one master with repeaters when the number of drops exceeds 31 The pin out diagram for the Modbus communication port is shown in Figure 21 on page 52 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Set up and Getting Started Configuration of the Serial Link The Communication parameter group contains the parameters that govern the baud rate watchdog timer and protocol selection for the serial interface See page 131 for information on the parameters in this parameter group All addresses from 1 to 247 are allowed for WF2 drives Address 0 is a broadcast address understood by all drives however no reply is returned for messages sent to this address 6 7 2 Parameter Addresses Each parameter is assigned a unique memory address to permit easy reading and config uration Section 7 and 11 list all WF2 parameters and the memory address assigned to each Note that for the standard keypad by default parameter addresses are not shown They may be displayed by setting Show Param to Enabled see page 129 For the enhanced keypad addresses are always shown 6 7 3 Drive Control via the Serial Link As explained in Section 6 6 starting on page 69 the serial link may be configured to be the control path f
76. the shield Use a shielded motor cable earthed over a large area at both sides The shield should be routed uninterrupted from the GND terminal of the inverter to the GND terminal of the mo tor If a shielded motor line cannot be used the unshielded motor line should be laid in a metal duct The metal duct must be uninterrupted and adequately earthed The following points are prescribed if radio interference suppression is to be realized in accordance with EN 55011 EN 55014 and EN 50081 1 Preceding the unit by a line filter option or a line filter and a output choke line filter 1 and output choke not included in the scope of delivery Laying the motor cable in a shielded configuration Laying the control cable in a shielded configuration Observe general RFI suppression measures refer to the chapter 4 5 EMC Electro magnetic Compatibility Lay motor line power and signal cables as far away from each other as possible and sep arately If a line filter option is used the smallest possible spatial distance from the frequency inverter must be selected so that both units can be connected by short connection leads If an output choke is used option it must be fitted in the direct vicinity of the inverter and connected to the inverter through screened cables earthed at both ends Screened signal cables should not be routed in parallel with power cables An earthed met al cable duct is recommendable for these signa
77. this parameter you must observe the drive s response to an incremental change in the feedback input over a certain length of time and then decide if this response is acceptable For example if the feedback input changed 1 V or 1 mA for 5 seconds what is the drive s response Is it acceptable Would you prefer to have the drive ignore a change over such a short time period but still react to longer time durations say 8 to 10 seconds If so decreasing the integral gain by reducing the value for parameter PID Int Gain would have that effect 13 2 7 Parameter PID Deriv Gain Parameter PID Deriv Gain is the derivative feedback gain for the process control loop This parameter calibrates the magnitude of a step response to a change in the feedback signal Z CAUTION UNSTABLE OPERATION Changing the value of this parameter to a number greater than 0 may result in unstable operation Since most applications only require integral feedback conditioning not deriva tive feedback conditioning which is accomplished with this parameter adjustment of this parameter should only be performed by experienced personnel and with great care Failure to observe this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage 13 3 Tuning the PID Control Loop Once the parameters are initially configured you should tune them so the process control loop operates as optimally as possible To make tuning easier the following recommenda tions shou
78. to 50 C 32 to 122 F Note that these ratings are limited to full nominal line installations on some models On smaller frame sizes 0 75 to 7 5 kW models see figure 1 on page 14 to access the screws holding the conduit plate in place you must first remove the terminal access cover Once the cover is removed unscrew the screws securing the conduit plate and remove the conduit plate With the conduit plate removed additional air circulates through the unit as sembly which permits operation in the expanded temperature range On the larger frame sizes 11 to 55 kW models see figure 2 on page 15 the screws se curing the conduit plate are directly accessible from outside the unit Simply unscrew the screws securing the conduit plate and then remove the conduit plate to permit operation in the expanded temperature range Also note that an IP21 conversion kit is available for NEMA 1 IP31 models For more infor mation see section 9 2 on page 145 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 21 22 4 4 2 Minimum Torque Values to Secure Cover If you remove the cover of an IP55 or IP66 WF2 drive models D or N it is imperative that the cover be closed and re secured with sufficient tightness to maintain environmental in tegrity The table below specifies the torque values for the bolts that secure the covers on the various WF2 models Torque Value WF2 Enclosure Type Metric
79. to the WF2 drive Siemens P1 A Siemens P1 communication board is attached to the drive Metasys N2 A Metasys N2 communication board is attached to the drive Range see table Default Option Board Read Only Address 0004 This parameter shows whether an option board is attached to the WF2 drive by identifying the type of option board installed The following values may be displayed for this parameter Displayed Name Type of Option Board None An option board is not attached to the WF2 drive WF2AIO 01 The WF2AIO 01 option board is attached to the drive 0 Range Default 7 5 Drive Status Group This parameter group contains parameters that are concerned with the basic operating val ues of the WF2 drive and attached motor Output Freq Read Only Address 0020 This parameter contains the frequency output to the motor It is not modified by slip com pensation parameter Slip Comp see page 102 0 Range 0 00 320 00 Hz Default Output Voltage Read Only Address 0022 This parameter shows the voltage being output to the motor 0 Range 0 V to Line Voltage Default Output Current Read Only Address 0023 This parameter contains the current output to the motor Range 0 to 250 of Drive Rating in Amps Default Drive Load Read Only Address 0024 This parameter shows the percentage of maximal load relative to the drive s capacity 0 Range 250 250 Default
80. 0 4 0 5 0 5 0 6 8 3 9 5 3 5003 7x 4 0 5 0 4 0 5 0 7 6 7 6 6 1 6 1 5005 5x 5 5 7 5 7 5 10 0 10 4 14 1 9 0 11 0 5007 5x 7 5 10 0 7 5 10 0 14 1 14 1 11 0 11 0 5011 0x 11 0 15 0 15 0 20 0 3 phase 20 8 27 8 17 0 22 0 575 V AC 0 575 V AC 5015 0x 15 0 20 0 18 5 25 0 15 27 8 33 4 22 0 27 0 5018 5x 18 5 25 0 22 0 30 0 33 4 39 1 27 0 32 0 5022 0x 22 0 30 0 22 0 30 0 39 1 39 1 32 0 32 0 5030 0x 30 0 40 0 37 0 50 0 52 0 65 2 41 0 52 0 5037 0x 37 0 50 0 45 0 60 0 52 0 62 0 52 0 62 0 5045 0x 45 0 60 0 55 0 75 0 62 0 77 0 62 0 77 0 5055 0x 55 0 75 0 75 0 100 0 77 0 99 0 77 0 99 0 Table 3 575 V AC Models 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 41 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Technical Characteristics 3 3 Environmental Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F l Storage temperature 20 C to 65 C 4 F to 149 F Maximum heatsink temperature 100 C 212 F Humidity 096 to 9596 non condensing Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft without derating Maximum vibration 5 9 m s 19 2 ft s 0 6 G Acoustic noise 80 dba sound power at 1 m 3 ft Cooling 0 75 and 1 5 kW models and all N models Natural convection 2 2 to 55 kW NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 models Forced air 1 On NEMA 1 models with conduit plate removed the operating temperature is O C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F for 230 and 4
81. 0 7x 0 75 1 0 1 1 1 5 5 6 4 8 6 7 6 7 4 8 4 2 5 7 5 7 2001 5x 1 5 2 0 1 5 2 0 9 0 7 8 9 0 7 8 7 8 6 8 7 8 6 8 2002 2x 2 2 3 0 4 0 5 0 12 7 11 0 15 4 154 g 230v AC 11 0 9 6 13 1 13 1 2003 7x 4 0 5 0 5 5 7 5 20 2 17 5 25 3 25 3 17 5 15 2 22 0 22 0 2005 5x 5 5 7 5 7 5 10 0 3 phase 29 2 25 3 32 2 32 2 25 3 22 0 28 0 28 0 200 230 V AC 2007 5x 7 5 10 0 7 5 10 0 15 37 2 32 2 37 2 32 2 32 2 28 0 32 2 28 0 2011 0x 11 0 15 0 15 0 20 0 52 1 46 4 63 3 63 3 48 3 42 0 54 0 54 0 2015 0x 15 0 20 0 18 5 25 0 62 1 54 0 68 0 68 0 62 1 54 0 68 0 68 0 2018 5x 18 5 25 0 22 0 30 0 78 2 68 0 80 0 80 0 78 2 68 0 80 0 80 0 2022 0x 22 0 30 0 30 0 40 0 92 0 80 0 104 0 104 0 92 0 80 0 104 0 104 0 Table 1 115 and 230 V AC Models 1 Input current is from the rated 115 V AC source 1 0 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Technical Characteristics Motor Power Maximum Input Current A Output Current A Model Constant Variable Constant Variable Constant Variable Input Output Number Torque Torque Torque Torque Torque Torque WF2K Volta
82. 0489 EISE Sm IO MIX ovde 98 Torque Limits Group Current Limit 0331 1 200 150 98 Disabled 0 Fixed Lvls 1 Trq Limit Type 0601 By DI 2 Disabled 98 Follow AI 3 On Freq 4 Trq Lim Mtr Fwd 0332 1 200 150 99 Trq Lim Reg Fwd 10333 1 200 80 99 Trq Lim Mtr Rev 0334 1 200 150 99 Trq Lim Reg Rev 0335 1 200 80 100 Trq Lim Freq 0602 0 0 320 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 100 Al 1 0 Al 2 1 Trq Lim Al 0603 Al A 2 Al 1 100 Al B 3 Al C 4 Regen Timeout 0605 0 60 s 1s 100 Table 32 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 1 65 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name TERA Range Default n d Tie Drive Output Group CT SVC 0 VT SVC 1 Torque Type 0500 d i a D 2 CT V Hz 2pc 101 VT V Hz 4 CT V Hz 2pc 5 Carrier Freq 0501 1 0 16 0 kHz Varies 102 Auto Carrier 0502 p E Disabled 102 Slip Comp O coe oe i None 102 V Boost Config 0553 0 00 30 00 Varies by model 102 Set V Boost 0554 on 1 None 103 Boost Taper Frq 0555 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq 160 00 Hz 103 Boost Taper VIt 0557 0 00 100 00 Varies by model 103 Motor Setup Group Nom Mtr Current 0520 Model dependent Varies by model 104 Nom Mir Voltage 0521 100 690 V AC Varies by model 104 Nom Mir Freq 0522 25 00 320 00 Hz 60 00 Hz 104 Nom Mtr RPM 0524 0 10000 RPM Varies by model 104 Mtr Ovid Sca
83. 0708 Jog Revers 5 PS In 1 112 PS In 1 6 D7 Configure 0709 PS In 2 7 PS In 2 112 D8 Configure 0710 PS In 3 8 PS In 3 112 D9 Configure 0711 Alt Rmp 1 9 Alt Rmp 1 113 Alt Rmp 2 10 EMOP Spd 11 EMOP Spd 12 T K Switch 13 L R Switch 14 DC Inject 15 Torque Lim 16 D10 Configure 0712 Alt Rmp 2 113 s SL Override 17 n PID Enable 18 Flt Reset 25 Ext Fault 26 8Bit DI PS IM 27 Step Chg 2 Filter Time 0701 1 255 ms 5 ms 113 Analog Inputs Group Normal 0 Broken Wire Det 1 A1 Configure 0741 Bipolar 2 Normal 113 4 20 mA 3 0 10 Bipolar 4 Table 32 2 Added to parameters D6 Configure D10 Configure when the Sequencer application is loaded This application also limits other functionality See section 10 for further information 07 11 03 08 GB TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 167 Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name poses Range Default ish i Be A1 Invert 0742 paka Normal 114 A1 Span 0743 0 0 200 0 100 0 114 A1 Offset 0744 0 0 100 0 0 0 114 A1 Filter Time 0745 1 1000 ms 5 ms 114 Normal 0 4 20 mA 1 A2 Configure 0751 B s a Normal 114 Pls in 20kHz 4 Pls in 100kHz 5 A2 Invert 0752 ad Normal 115 A2 Span 0753 0 0 200 0 100 0 115 A2 Offset 0754 0 0 100 0 0 0 115 A2 Filter Time 0755 1 1000 ms 5 ms 115 AINA Invert 0260 node Normal
84. 1 L R Fkey 2 L R SerLnk 3 None 86 Local Config 0408 Kypd C amp R 0 Ser C amp R 1 Ser C Nm R 2 Nm non ser 3 Kypd C amp R 86 Remote Config 0409 TS C amp R 0 Kpd R TS C 1 TS R Kpd C 2 NM R Ser C 3 TS C Ser R 4 Serial Lnk 5 TS C amp R 87 Catch on Fly 0620 Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 87 Stop Key 0950 Disabled 0 Rmp to Stp 1 Cst to Stp 2 Cst to Stp 88 162 Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name Memory Address Range Default User Setting See Page Enter Key 0978 Disabled 0 L R Switch 1 T K Switch 2 PID Enable 3 SL Override 4 Disabled 88 Speed Reference Group Minimum Freq 0301 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 Hz 88 Maximum Freq 0303 Minimum Freq to 320 Hz 60 Hz 89 Main Speed Ref Jog Ref Config 0800 0803 Spd Rf 1 0 Spd Rf 2 1 Spd Rf 3 2 Spd Rf1 R2 3 Spd Rf1 R3 4 Spd R1 R2 R3 5 Spd R2 R3 6 S R1 k R2 7 Spd R1 R2 8 SpdR2 R1 9 Spd R1 R3 10 Spd R3 R1 11 Spd R2 R3 12 SpdR3 R2 13 S R1 R2 R3 14 S R1 R3 R2 15 Spd Fixed 16 8bit DI PS 17 Spd R1 R3 24 Same as Main Speed Ref Spd Rf 2 Spd Fixed 89 90 Ref1 Config 0810 Al 1 90 Ref2
85. 1 Page 136 E os DQ3 AQ2 User Units Program a MlFeedback 3 E Faul h P gt Mane 5 yen 182 Configure Page Configure Configure Page 122 Div Number comm doy Config Page 111 Page 118 Page 120 Page 128 Page 131 Page 136 Nom Mtr DB Cth value MI D4 At Offset R1 Configure AQ Motor Thm User Label 1 Comm Drop MI PID Prop RPM Page 107 Configure Page 114 Page 118 Calibrate Prot Page 128 Page 132 Gain Page 104 9 Page 112 9 9 Page 121 Page 123 9 Page 137 MtrOvid oc inj Contig M DS A1 Filter Time R2 Configure AQ2 Output Reference User Label 2 Comm MW PID int Scale Page 108 Configure Page 114 Page 118 Type Fault Page 128 Timeout Gain Page 104 9 Page 112 9 9 Page 121 Page 123 9 Page 132 Page 137 Mtr Ovid Time DC Inj Cur Lvl D6 Configure A2 Configure DPQ Scaling AQ Offse Loss Ref Freq User Label 3 E PID Deriv Page 104 Page 108 Page 112 Page 114 Page 118 Page 121 Page 123 Page 128 Page 133 Page 137 Motor RS DC p pae D7 Configure A2 Invert Current Leve Conture Fan Loss Language EKP Timeout Feedback Page 105 page 499 Page 112 Page 115 page 118 Page 121 Page 123 Page 128 Page 133 Page 137 DC Puls Start DC Inj Freq D8 Configure A2 Span Current Leve AQA OV Auto Show Param 5 Cn E PID High Page 105 Page 109 Page 112 Page 115 2 Calibrate Reset Word 1 Limi 9 9 9 9 Page 119 Page 121
86. 116 AINA Offset 0261 0 0 100 0 0 0 116 AINA Span 0262 0 0 200 0 100 0 116 AINA Filter Time 0263 1 1000 ms 5 ms 116 AINB Invert 0265 ined Normal 116 AINB Offset 0266 0 0 100 0 0 0 116 AINB Span 0267 0 0 200 0 100 0 116 AINB Filter Time 0268 1 1000 ms 5 ms 116 AINC Invert 0270 pada Normal 116 AINC Offset 0271 0 0 100 0 0 0 116 AINC Span 0272 0 0 200 0 100 0 116 AINC Filter Time 0273 1 1000 ms 5 ms 116 Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 168 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name Memory Address Range Default User Setting See Page Digital Outputs Group DQ1 Configure 0770 DQ2 Configure 0771 DQ3 Configure 0772 R1 Configure 0780 R2 Configure 0781 Not Assign 0 Drive Run 1 Run Fwd 2 Run Rev 3 Drive Ray 4 At Speed 5 Drive Flted 6 Drive NotFlt 7 Kpd in Ctl 8 Drv in Rem 9 Jogging 10 Curr Lvl 1 11 Curr Lvl 2 12 Trq Lvl 1 13 Trq Lvl 2 14 15 16 17 Temp Lvl 18 In Curr Lim 19 In Trq Lim 20 Loss Ref 21 In Ser L Ctrl 22 In Ser L Ovrd 23 Zero Speed 24 Frq Low Th 25 PID High 26 PID Low 27 By Ser Lnk 28 Auto Reset 29 Drive Rdy 117 At Speed 118 Run Rev 118 Drv Flted 118 Drive Run 118 DPQ Scaling 0789 6 48 96 3072 times fre quency 6 118 Current Level 1 08
87. 2 Analog input 2 of the WF2 drive Al A Analog input A of the Analog Input Output Option Board Al B Analog input B of the Analog Input Output Option Board Al C Analog input C of the Analog Input Output Option Board Range see table Default Al 1 Regen Timeout Address 0605 This parameter sets the limit for the amount of time that the drive may continue to run in regenerative current limit after a Stop command is issued If the configured time duration expires and the drive is not yet at zero speed Fault 59 Regen Timeout occurs and the drive coasts to a stop Range 0 60 s Default 1 s 7 13 Drive Output Group 100 This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the SVC and V Hz algorithms used in the drive Figure 30 on page 101 shows how the parameters of this group determine a V Hz curve TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Drive Output Group Parameters Voltage A Nom Mtr Voltage Boost Taper VIt V Boost Config Frequency gt Boost Taper Frq Nom Mtr Freq Figure 30 How a V Hz Curve Is Determined Torque Type Address 0500 This parameter selects the control algorithms used by the WF2 drive The following func tions may be assigned to this parameter note that all SVC control modes require optimum setup of motor parameters see section 7 14 Motor Setup Group on page 103 for more information Display Function Sensorless
88. 2 Model Watts Watts Watts Frequency for WF2K Dissipated Dissipated Dissipated Rated Current kHz at 4 kHz at 7 kHz at 10 kHz 2S00 7x 37 44 51 10 2S01 5x 59 71 81 10 2S02 2x 77 92 106 10 2000 7x 37 44 51 10 2001 5x 59 71 81 10 2002 2x 77 92 106 10 2003 7x 112 135 156 10 2005 5x 162 212 220 10 2007 5x 195 251 Ul 6 2011 0x 267 312 354 1 9 2015 0x 276 361 7 2018 5x 597 655 676 1 8 2022 0x 642 685 1 5 Table 6 Required Dissipation for Models Entirely Inside an Enclosure TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 19 Switching Frequency Max Switching RE Watts Watts Watts Frequency for Dissipated Dissipated Dissipated Rated Current kHz at 4 kHz at 7 kHz at 10 kHz 4000 7x 33 43 53 10 4001 5x 52 69 84 10 4002 2x 68 90 110 10 4003 7x 99 131 161 10 4005 5x 112 144 174 10 4007 5x 139 180 217 10 4011 0x 170 210 255 9 4015 0x 200 245 1 5 4018 5x 280 383 7 4022 0x 335 374 1 5 4030 0x 398 1 25 4037 0x 600 670 l1 5 4045 0x 710 4 4055 0x 720 l 2 5000 7x 40 52 64 10 5001 5x 62 83 101 10 5002 2x 82 108 132 10 5003 7x 85 115 155 10 5005 5x 91 131 172 10 5007 5x 112 160 8 5011 0x 164 235 282 1 9 5015 0x 218 277 ll 6 5018 5x 286 364 1 6 5022 0x 343 388 1 5 5030 0x 417 4 5037 0x 700 4 5045 0x 720 0 3 5055 0x 745 1 2 Table 6 Require
89. 29 fault code 40 will be generated Range 2 0 60 0 s Default 2 0 s Cntl Word 1 Address 0201 The bits of the word represented by this parameter perform the following actions note that if parameter Application is set to Sequencer to invoke the Sequencer application Bits 10 and 11 are inactivated 0 1 1510 13 12 in 00 9 J 8 7 6 4 3 2 t 0 Bit When Set to 1 Signifies Bit When Set to 1 Signifies 8 Command Alternate Ramp 1 O Send commands via serial link 9 Command Alternate Ramp 2 1 Set reference frequency by serial link 10 Switch to Remote mode 2 Command Forward direction 11 Set terminal strip as control path 3 Command Reverse direction 12 Initiate DC injection braking 4 USE PE XTE value qs TEIETENGE fre quency 13 Perform a freewheel stop 5 Command Preset Speed bit 1 14 not used 6 Command Preset Speed bit 2 15 Reset inverter 7 Command Preset Speed bit 3 Range 0 65535 Default 0 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 133 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Parameters 134 Communication Group Cntl Word 2 Address 0202 The bits of the word represented by this parameter perform the following actions note that if parameter Application is set to Sequencer to invoke the Sequencer application Bit 0 enables this application for use otherwise Bit O enables PID control Also Bits 13 and 14 will be inactivated since network communication
90. 2K2015 0x 1 0 WF2K4030 0x 0 5 WF2K5030 0x 0 596 WF2K2018 5x 1 096 WF2K4037 0x 0 5 WF2K5037 0x 0 596 WF2K2022 0x 1 096 WF2K4045 0x 0 5 WF2K5045 0x 0 596 WF2K4055 0x 0 5 WF2K5055 0x 0 5 o Range 0 00 30 00 Default varies Set V Boost Address 0554 This parameter determines whether a voltage boost is applied Voltage boost is the amount of voltage added at zero frequency expressed as a percentage of nominal motor voltage which is the start of the V Hz curve The boost tapers linearly to zero at the point set in pa rameters Boost Taper Frq and Boost Taper VIt see below Display Function None No voltage boost Automatic The WF2 drive calculates the amount of boost required 0 Range see table Default None Boost Taper Frq Address 0555 This parameter works with the Set V Boost parameter When voltage boost is applied at the start of the V Hz curve the amount of boost tapers linearly and reaches zero at the point established by the frequency set in this parameter and the voltage set in parameter Boost Taper VIt see below 0 Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 60 00 Hz Boost Taper VIt Address 0557 This parameter works with the Set V Boost parameter When voltage boost is applied at the start of the V Hz curve the amount of boost tapers linearly and reaches zero at the point established by the voltage set in this parameter and the frequency s
91. 2x 82 8 5002 2x 110 9 2502 2x 43 4 4003 7x 82 8 5003 7x 110 9 2000 7x 56 3 4005 5x 47 13 5005 5x 62 16 2001 5x 56 3 4007 5x 47 13 5007 5x 62 16 2002 2x 43 4 4011 0x 47 13 5011 0x 62 16 2003 7x 27 6 4015 0x 33 20 5015 0x 62 16 2005 5x 30 6 4018 5x 24 26 5018 5x 33 30 2007 5x 30 6 4022 0x 24 26 5022 0x 33 30 2011 0x 13 12 4030 0x 24 26 5030 0x 33 30 2015 0x 13 12 4037 0x 8 2 75 5037 0x 12 80 2018 5x 4 3 36 4045 0x 8 2 75 5045 0x 12 80 2022 0x 4 3 36 4055 0x 8 2 75 5055 0x 12 80 Table 16 Minimum Dynamic Brake DB Resistor Values 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 35 Connections 36 5 6 Terminals Found on the WF2 Control Board 5 6 1 Description of the Control Terminals Figure 6 shows the control terminals found on the I O board of the WF2 drive The actual control board cannot be accessed by the user Note that due to labeling constraints the labels for some terminals start on the left either on the side or top of the terminal block are interrupted by the terminal screw and then fin ish on the right either on the side or top of the terminal block For example terminal A1 1 is labeled with A on the left side of the block and 11 to the right of the terminal screw on top of the block Similarly terminal NC2 is labeled with N to the left of the terminal screw on top of the block and then C2 on the right side of the block As is shown in the figure the terminals are divided into four
92. 30 0 200 0 118 Current Level 2 0831 0 200 0 119 Torque Level 1 0832 0 200 0 119 Torque Level 2 0833 0 200 0 119 Freq Level 1 0834 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 119 Freq Level 2 0835 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 119 Freq Level 3 0836 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 119 Drive Temp Lvl 0837 0 100976 100 119 Low Freq Thres 0841 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq 0 0 Hz 119 RA Configure 0283 Same as R1 Configure Drv Flted 120 RB Configure 0284 Same as R1 Configure Drv Flted 120 07 11 03 08 GB Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 169 Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting Analog Outputs Group Not Assigned 0 Motor Spd 1 Motor Curr 2 Out Torque 3 l Out Volt 4 AQ1 Configure 0790 Out Power 5 Motor Spd 120 Out Freq 6 Ref Freq 7 Motor Temp 8 PID Fback 9 AQ1 Calibrate 0791 0 105 100 120 AQ2 Configure 0792 Same as AQ1 Configure Out Torque 120 AQ Calibrate 0793 0 105 100 121 0 20 mA 0 AQ2 Output Type 0794 4 20 mA 1 0 20mA 121 AQ2 Offset 0795 0 100 20 121 AQA Configure 0275 Same as AQ1 Configure 121 AQA
93. 512 8 297 9 7 1 18 5 22 0 1 3 37 0 55 0 I2 81 3 200 2 711 2 317 8 796 8 355 5 10 7 1 Three phase 230 V AC models 2 460 V AC and 575 V AC models 3 Overall package height Dimensions in mm TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 15 Technical Characteristics Figure 3 Dimensions of IP66 NSF BISSC certified Models KW A B C D E F 0 75 3 7 200 2 280 2 248 9 327 9 241 8 6 9 5 5 7 5 260 3 381 0 310 8 404 4 263 4 9 6 11 0 15 0 330 2 431 8 380 2 455 2 265 9 9 6 Dimensions in mm 1 6 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Technical Characteristics 3 7 Weights of Models Power Rating kW 115 and 230 V AC 460 and 575 V AC Weight kg 0 75 0 75 43 15 15 a 2 2 2 2 45 3 7 37 5 5 5 5 6 6 7 5 75 MG 11 0 220 Tm 15 0 30 0 272 18 5 37 0 48 6 22 0 45 0 n 55 0 48 6 Table 4 IP31 and IP55 Models Power Rating kW Weight kg 0 75 77 E 7 7 2 2 7 7 sd 7 7 5 5 15 9 m 15 9 wee 21 8 Top 21 8 Table 5 IP66 NSF BISSC certified Models 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 17 4 Installation 4 1 Preliminary Inspection Before storing or installing the WF2 drive thoroughly inspect the devi
94. 60 V AC models and O C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F for 575 V AC models See section 4 4 1 on page 21 for further information 3 4 Electrical Voltage input WF2K1Sx models 115 V AC 1 Phase 10 WF2K2Sx models 230 V AC 1 Phase 15 WF2K2x models 200 to 230 V AC 3 Phase 15 WF2K4x models 380 to 460 V AC 3 Phase 15 WF2K5x models 575 V AC 3 Phase 15 Line frequency 50 60 Hz 2 Hz DC bus voltage for Overvoltage trip Dynamic Brake activation Nominal undervoltage UV trip 115 230 V AC Models460 V AC Models575 V AC Models 407 V DC 814 V DC 1017 V DC 391 V DC 782 V DC 973 V DC 202 V DC 404 V DC 505 V DC Control system Voltage Vector pulse width modulation PWM Carrier frequency 1 to 16 kHz in 0 1 kHz steps Output voltage 0 to 100 of line voltage 3 Phase 230 V AC for WF2K1Sx models Overload capacity 150 of rated rms for 60 seconds Starting torque Up to 20096 of nominal torque motor dependent Starting current Up to 25096 of drive rating for 20 s if the output frequency is less than 30 Hz Frequency range 0 1 320 Hz Frequency stability 0 01 Hz digital 0 1 analog over 24 h 10 C change Frequency setting By keypad by external signal 0 to 5 V DC 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA or 10 V DC or by a pulse train of up to 100 kHz Agency listing UL and CUL Listed CE marked 12 TB Wood s
95. 7 Configure must also be set to Step Change DIS Digital input D8 Parameter D8 Configure must also be set to Step Change Dig Digital input D9 Parameter D9 Configure must also be set to Step Change DIO Digital input D10 Parameter D10 Configure must also be set to Step Change The frequency input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in pa Al1 Low rameter Al Low Thres n Al Hiah The frequency input to analog input 1 goes above the value set in pa 9 rameter Al High Thres n The frequency input to analog input 2 goes below the value set in pa Al2 Low rameter Al Low Thres n AI2 Hiah The frequency input to analog input 2 goes above the value set in pa 9 rameter Al High Thres n Either the signal input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in pa AliL AI1H rameter Al Low Thres n or above that set in parameter Al High Thres n 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB 153 WF2 0 75 55 0 Sequencer Application Seg Configure Group 154 Display Condition Causing Advancement to Step X DHO AHL Either digital input D10 set to Step Change or the input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in parameter Al Low Thres n DI9 AI2H Either digital input D9 set to Step Change or the input to analog input 2 goes above the value set in parameter Al High Thres n Function key F1 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F1 Key Config F1 Key must als
96. 9 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to param eter D3 Configure When the Sequencer application is loaded the function Step Chg is al so available Range see D3 Configure Default Alt Rmp 1 D10 Configure Address 0712 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D10 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to pa rameter D3 Configure When the Sequencer application is loaded the function Step Chg is also available Range see D3 Configure Default Alt Rmp 2 Filter Time Address 0701 This parameter sets the amount of time in which the WF2 drive will recognize a change in the signal to a digital input For example for the default value of 5 ms when a digital input transitions from low to high a 5 ms delay will occur before the digital input is recognized by the drive as having transitioned 0 Range 1 255 ms Default 5 ms 7 17 Analog Inputs Group 07 11 03 08 GB This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the functions of the analog in puts found in control terminal group TB1 see figure 6 on page 36 A1 Configure Address 0741 This parameter configures what type of signal is being sent to terminals A11 and A12 an alog input 1 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Signal is not altered Note that a 4
97. Active Logic to Active Low see page 110 for more information Note that this section only provides the connection diagrams for a dis cussion of the function diagrammed see the previous section TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Connections TB4 TB4 CM CM EN EN D10 D10 D9 D9 D8 D8 D7 e 5 D7 6 5 D6 9 E D6 O 5 D5 E D5 D4 O n D4 D3 Y D3 O E Bale an 13 D2 ofS D1 oe E D1 PA Ts Sati g 24 D 241 Q 24 24 O oo 24 O or NC 24 or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 15 Connections for 2 and 3 wire Control Active Low Logic TB4 TB4 CM Y EN 7 Q D10 Q D9 O O D8 O R 3 D7 O Run 2 Oo icm 5 D6 Reverse 5 Y o g D5 OH 3 9 E D4 O E t D3 t s Mim 5 D2 e 5 2 ee D1 Forward pa Y 24 Y O 24 O Oo or NC 24 or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 16 Example of Run Forward Run Reverse Control Active Low Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 49 Connections 50 TB4 TB4 CM CM EN EN D10 D10 D9 D9 D8
98. Address 0482 This parameter sets the lower frequency of the second frequency band to be skipped Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 2 Hi Lim Address 0483 This parameter establishes the upper frequency of the second frequency band to be skipped Range Skip 2 Low Lim to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 3 Low Lim Address 0484 This parameter establishes the lower frequency of the third frequency band to be skipped Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 9 SJ Parameters Torque Limits Group Skip 3 Hi Lim Address 0485 This parameter establishes the upper frequency of the third frequency band to be skipped Range Skip 3 Low Lim to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 4 Low Lim Address 0486 This parameter establishes the lower frequency value of the fourth frequency band to be skipped Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 4 Hi Lim Address 0487 This parameter establishes the upper frequency value of the fourth frequency band to be skipped Range Skip 4 Low Lim to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 5 Low Lim Address 0488 This parameter establishes the lower frequency value of the fifth frequency band to be skipped Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 5 Hi Lim Address 0489 This parameter establishes the upper frequency value of the fifth frequency band to be skipped Range Skip
99. B D 500 22 5000 4005 5B D and 4007 5B D 120 45 3000 4011 0B D and 4015 0B D 120 150 3000 4018 5B D thru 4030 0B D 60 220 900 4037 0B D thru 4055 0B D 60 250 900 4000 7N thru 4003 7N 500 30 12500 4005 5N and 4007 5N 120 12 13500 4011 0N and 4015 0N 120 12 13500 5000 7B D thru 5003 7B D 500 28 12500 5005 5B D and 5007 5B D 120 45 3000 5011 0B D and 5015 0B D 120 150 3000 5018 5B D thru 5030 0B D 60 220 900 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 107 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters 108 Model WF2K DB Res Value DB Rth Value DB Cth Value 5037 0B D thru 5055 0B D 60 250 900 5000 7N thru 5003 7N 500 30 12500 5005 5N and 5007 5N 120 12 13500 5011 0N and 5015 0N 120 12 13500 0 DB Res Value Range 0 3276 6 Q Default varies Default varies Default varies DB Rth Value Range 0 16383 DB Cth Value Range 0 65535 DC Inj Config Address 0411 DC injection braking may be used to stop the motor more quickly than is possible by either a ramp to stop or a coast to stop The WF2 drive allows DC braking to be initiated either when a digital input assigned to DC braking becomes true or when bit 12 of parameter Cntl Word 1 is set to 1 or when a specified frequency is reached or when any of these occur When using a digital input for DC braking one of the DI parameters see page 110 must be used to configure the selected digital input for DC braking The amount of braking force is s
100. BERGES User s Manual lt 3v SES WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive se featuring N models with NSF and BISSC certification 0 75 55 0 kW e Ss Ss N N N N N N ETRAC NSORLESS VECTOR DRIVE LI L dz TRADEMARK NOTICE DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association ODVA Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric NSF is a registered trademark of the National Sanitation Foundation UL is a trademark of Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated Table of Contents 1 General Information 034522 5203408 vvv nu I ER RERO EE QM EE EE CL NE OE RE S 5 1 1 Safety and Operating Instructions for Drive Converters silii 5 2 Introduction oss Reed P gere ib o eon e bid o ete ev d ed rr ad deg 8 2 1 Product OVerview 5 des odas De Ds o read eee 8 2 2 Manual OVetvi8W uertice Re gcn n Rc n BG e Re Sel ax o iic ee A 8 2 3 Publication History 0 0 aaa a a E aa RR m m hr 9 3 Technical Characteristics oo siri cede A a pre eh eal ee uds 10 3 1 Interpreting Model Numbers 00 0 RR 3 e 10 3 2 Power and Current Ratings a a err 10 3 3 Environmental oe eod Cre SLE EO ed Bane Mo UMP Ae tt 12 3 4 FICCHIICAl asin E 12 3 5 Control Featur s edere ue echt Ub EAR ACER RAS SR OC AA C Re 13 3 6 Dimensions ai A AS ea a eee ea T mE 14 3 7 Weights of Models
101. Config 0811 Al 2 90 Ref3 Config 0812 Al 2 90 07 11 03 08_GB Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 163 Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting None 0 TS no Mem 1 TS w Mem 2 EMOP Config 0420 TS w MemP 3 None 91 T K no Mem 4 T K w Mem 5 T K w MemP 6 Set Fixed Speed 0804 0 0 320 0 Hz 5 0 Hz 91 Set k Factor 0801 0 0 100 0 10 0 92 Ramps Group Accel Time 1 0310 0 1 3200 0 s 3 0s 92 Decel Time 1 0311 0 1 3200 0 s 3 0s 92 Accel Time 2 0312 0 1 3200 0 s 1 0s 92 Decel Time 2 0313 0 1 3200 0 s 1 05 92 Accel Time 3 0314 0 1 3200 0 s 10 0s 92 Decel Time 3 0315 0 1 3200 0 s 10 0s 92 Acc Dec Time 4 3018 0 1 3200 0 s 10 0s 148 Acc Dec Time 5 3020 0 1 3200 0 s 10 0s 148 EMOP Ramp Time 0316 0 1 200 0 s 30 0 s 93 None 0 AR1 on DI 1 AR1 Configure 0450 AR1 by Frq 2 AR1 on DI 93 AR1 Strt 3 AR1 Fwd Rv 4 None 0 AR2 on DI 1 AR2 Configure 0451 AR2 by Frq 2 AR2 on DI 93 AR2 Strt 3 AR2 Fwd Rv 4 Main Ramp Type 0452 Linear 0 Linear 94 S Curve 1 Main S Rounding 0453 0 0 10 0 s 0 0s 94 Linear 0 AR1 Ramp Type 0454 S Curve 1 Linear 94 AR1 S Rounding 0455 0 0 10 0 s 0 0s 94 AR1 Switch Freq 0462 0 00 320 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 95 Linear 0
102. DC Inj Time Frq NOTE If this parameter is set to zero braking is applied until the enable input DI EN is de activated To re start the enable input must be restored to its active condition and then the Run command re issued See parameter DC Inj Config on page 108 for more information Range 0 00 60 00 s Default 0 20 s TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 109 Parameters 7 16 Digital Inputs Group This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the functions of the digital inputs control terminal group TB4 see figure 6 on page 36 Active Logic Address 0700 This parameter determines whether high input is regarded as true or low input is regarded as true A high input is input voltage between 10 and 24 V DC a low input is voltage between 0 and 3 V DC Input voltage cannot exceed 40 V DC Note that the EN Enable terminal on the TB4 terminal group is not effected by the setting of this parameter A high input to the EN terminal is always regarded as true Thus if the input to the terminal goes low the drive will not operate even if pull down logic is config ured The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Active Low Active Hgh Low input is true pull down logic High input is true pull up logic Range see table Default Active Hgh D2 Configure Address 0704 This parameter c
103. English 0 75 7 5 kW 115 and 230 V AC input 2 03 Nm 18 in lbs IP55 11 0 22 0 kW 230 V AC input 1 35 Nm 12 in lbs 0 75 15 0 kW 460 and 575 V AC input 2 03 Nm 18 in lbs 18 5 55 0 kW 460 and 575 V AC input 1 35 Nm 12 in lbs IP66 All versions 2 93 Nm 26 in lbs 4 5 EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility 4 5 1 Limit Classes With regard to interference suppression of machines or installations in conformity with EN 50081 Parts 1 and 2 or EN 55011 a distinction must be made between the limit classes A industrial networks and B domestic networks In the case of limit class A a line filter must be wired before every frequency inverter In the case of limit class B a filter must also be wired before it The inverters and accessories must be wired as shown in the following schematic If applied consistently the following suggested circuit will successfully render harmless the residual noise voltage on the GND conductor potential for external measurement systems TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Installation eee a Display or measurement output Choke BV or similar j j b Isolated against VAS A other potential ET To VDE 0875 To VDE 0875 External measurement systems
104. If the source of AC power to the WF2 drive is greater than 10 times the kVA rating shown in table 11 an isolation transformer or line reactor is recommended Consult BERGES for assistance in sizing the reactor Drive KW 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 0 Transformer kVA 2 4 5 9 13 18 23 Drive KW 15 0 18 5 22 0 30 0 370 450 55 0 Transformer kVA 28 36 42 56 70 90 112 Table 11 Transformer Sizing for the WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive NOTE E trAC WF2 Sensorless Vector Drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 2500 rms symmetrical amperes at 1096 above the maximum rated voltage TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 30 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Connections 5 3 3 Use of Isolation Transformers and Line Reactors In nearly all cases the WF2 drive may be connected directly to a power source However in the following cases a properly sized isolation transformer or line reactor should be uti lized to minimize the risk of drive malfunction or damage When the line capacity exceeds the requirements of the drive see Section 5 3 2 When power factor correction capacitors are used on the drive s power source When the power source experiences transient power interruptions or voltage spikes When the power source supplying the drive also supplies large devices such as DC drives that contain controlled rectifiers
105. Limit class A Limit class B NOTES Choke only if required e g owing to motor cable length gt 30 m Please consult BERGES For cables shorter than 20 cm an unscreened cable can be used between filter and in verter Interference Suppression Measures Electrical electronic devices are capable of influencing or disturbing each other through connecting cables or other metallic connections Electromagnetic compatibility consists of the factors interference resistance and interference emission Correct installation of the inverter in conjunction with any possible local interference suppression meas ures has a crucial effect on minimizing or suppressing mutual interference The scope of noise suppression measures depends on the limit value class the local situ ation and the application The following notes refer to a line power supply that is not contaminated by high frequency interference Other measures may be necessary to reduce or suppress interference if the line voltage is contaminated No generally valid recommendations can be given in such cases Please consult BERGES if all recommended interference suppression measures should not produce the desired result Basically it is not the cross section of the conductor that is important for radio frequency interference suppression but the surface area Since the high frequency interference does not flow through the entire cross section but mainly on the outer surface
106. P55 Models Entirely Enclosed in the Host Enclosure When a WF2 drive is entirely enclosed in a host enclosure the host enclosure must be properly sized to dissipate the heat generated by the drive and any other power dissipating devices also mounted in the host enclosure Table 6 on page 19 provides the watts dissi pated by the various models of WF2 drives at various switching frequencies Use this infor mation to adequately size the host enclosure and IP55 Models with Fins External to the Host Enclosure By mounting a WF2 drive so that its heatsink fins are outside of the host enclosure you may select a smaller host enclosure than that required when the drive is mounted entirely inside the host enclosure For most applications with this type of mounting typically you will not need such additional cooling devices as fans heat exchangers or air conditioners The amount by which the load on the host enclosure is reduced is the amount of watts dis sipated by the heatsinks of the drives Table 7 on page 21 shows the watts dissipated by each WF2 model after deducting the amount of watts dissipated by the heatsinks of the model Use the values shown in the table to adequately size the host enclosure For further information on mounting a drive with the fins outside of the host enclosure see Form 1364 WF2 Fins out Mounting Instructions Switching Frequency LE Max Switching WF
107. PID control function of the WF2 drive When configuring PID control loops you should bear in mind that the acceleration and de celeration ramps will affect closed loop operation For optimum performance the ramps should be setto the smallest values possible without causing nuisance tripping Chapter 13 provides further information on configuring and tuning PID control loops TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 135 WF2 0 75 55 0 08_GB Parameters 136 PID Configure Group PID Configure Address 0650 This parameter determines what means are used to enable PID control as well as the type of PID control that is enabled The following values may be assigned to this parameter Display PID Control is Enabled by Type of PID Control No PID PID control is always inactive Feed Fwd When Run condition exists Feed forward F fwd DI Digital input Feed forward F fwd Fkey Function key on enhanced keypad Feed forward F fwd Ser Serial communication Feed forward Full Range When Run condition exists Full range Full DI Digital input Full range Full Fkey Function key on enhanced keypad Full range Full Ser Serial communication Full range If you select a digital input or function key as the means to enable PID control remember to configure the parameter that sets the function of the digital input or function key to enable PID control to complete the implementa
108. Page 124 Page 129 Page 133 Page 137 DC Pulse DC Inj Time Torque Leve OC Auto F1 Key 6 On W PID Low Time Frq yin H3 page as tele ee Rese Config Word 2 Limi Page 105 Page 109 Page 119 Page 124 Page 129 Page 134 Page 137 SVC Lo Spd D10 A2 Filter Time Torque Leve AQB OT Auto F2 Key Ext Freq Ref PID High Comp Configure Page 115 2 Configure Rese Config Alarm Page 105 Page 113 Page 119 Page 121 Page 124 Page 129 Page 134 Page 138 Motor Type Filter Time AINA Invert Freq Level 1 AQB Fault Lockout F3 Key Ext Freq Ref PID Low Page 105 Page 113 Page 116 Page 119 Calibrate Config 2 Alarm 9 9 9 Page 121 Page 125 Page 129 Page 134 Page 138 Supply Auto Rese F4 Key 7 Status A PD Voltage Pago 19 pis mi Poster Time Config Word 1 Reference Page 106 9 9 9 Page 125 Page 129 Page 134 Page 138 LEGEND AINA Span Freq Level 3 Auto Rese Keypad Status Word MW PID Page 116 Page 119 Strt Control 3 Feedback 9 9 Page 125 Page 129 Page 135 Page 138 Parameter AINA Filter Drive Temp Net Timeout n PID Error Time Lvl Fit Page 138 pum z B E i EAR Page 116 Page 119 Page 125 Read Only ead Only Level 1 Level 2 AINB Invert RA Configure DC EL Fl ou D Stee Page 116 Page 120 ane SOUPE Lm CER Page 126 Page 138 1 Configurable Configurable 1 Level 1 Level 2 AINB Offset RB Configure Auto Res A PD 5 Een Page 116 Page 120 Page 156 Pago 138 E Parameter unvailabl
109. Page 79 Page 82 Page 87 Page 92 Page 94 Page 98 Active Spd Main S Ref ae aes Rounding LEGEND Page 79 9 J 9 Page 94 Parameter Motor RPM A1 Level Enter Key NT e Page 80 Page 82 Page 88 Page 94 y rr N Read Only Read Only Start Stop Ctrl A2 Level m nS i Level Level 2 Page 80 Page 82 J Page 94 AS Ka LY a a 4 z Configurable Configurable Papoea Freq Ref Ctrl DQ1 Status AINA Level ART Saien Level 1 Level 2 Page sn PPR RO REOR RON Jij Pages j Page 95 boo E Parameter unvailable when MWh Format Drive Lifetime DQ2 Status f AINB Level E ee de application Page 81 Page 80 Page 82 Page 83 Pa p YP loaded J J ge 95 7 1 Parameter modified when Drv Life WB n2s Sequencer application yer n Format panel Pag Saa Rounding loaded the number refers to JL Page 80 J J J Page 95 the notes shown below Current Step Elapsed R1 Status AQA Level a d Page 148 Page 80 Page 82 J Page 83 J Page 95 NOTES TN When the Sequencer application is loaded Step Time Runtime R2 Status AQB Level 4 Jog Accel Min Format Page 82 Page 83 Time 1 Parameter Accel Time 3 becomes Acc P 14 P ge 82 Page 83 P 95 Parameter Acce Page 148 J Page 80 J J Page 95 Dec Time 3 Step Time MWh Lifetime AQ1 Level RA Status Hog Dece 2 Parameter Accel Time 4 becomes Acc Sire a Page 81 Page 82 Page 83 paasi Dec Time 4 Page 148 J J J J ag
110. Parameters 07 11 03 08 GB Display Function The drive will not automatically reset and re start it must be reset man Disabled ually Enabled The drive will automatically reset and attempt to re start Range see table Default Disabled Fault Lockout Address 0871 This parameter sets the number of faults that may occur before automatic resetting is dis abled Once the number set by this parameter is exceeded a manual reset of the fault will be required A manual reset is accomplished by displaying an active fault display and then pressing the STOP key on the keypad or by using a digital input Range 0 10 Default 0 Auto Reset Time Address 0872 When automatic resetting of certain types of faults is enabled by one of the auto reset pa rameters for example OV Auto Reset OC Auto Reset or OT Auto Reset this param eter defines the autoreset lockout interval During the auto reset lockout interval the drive will reset certain faults up to the limit set with parameter Fault Lockout and execute a start in accordance with the settings of parameter Auto Reset Strt see below Once the auto reset lockout interval is exceeded the fault count will be reset to zero and auto reset ting will continue as though it were the first occurrence Range 0 3600 s Default 0 s Auto Reset Strt Address 0874 When automatic resetting of certain types of faults is enabled by one of the auto reset pa rameter
111. TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 78 Drive Status Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Drive Temp Read Only Address 0025 This parameter shows the actual temperature of the drive s heatsink Note that an overtem perature fault will be generated when the heatsink temperature reaches the value of param eter Drive Temp Trip see page 77 If desired you may configure a digital output to chan ge state when the temperature exceeds the value of parameter Drive Temp Lvl which in effect allows you to configure a warning of an impending overtemperature fault Range 20 125 C Default DC Bus Voltage Read Only Address 0026 This parameter shows the DC bus voltage Range 0 1000 V DC Default Motor Temp Read Only Address 0027 This parameter shows the estimated temperature of the motor as a percentage of the the oretical thermal capacity of the motor The estimated temperature and the thermal capacity are derived from a thermal model that utilizes the parameter values found in the Motor Set up Group see page 103 and on the estimated load on the motor Range 0 250 C Default Out Torque Read Only Address 0028 This parameter shows the estimated torque being supplied to the motor as a percentage of the nominal motor torque The estimation is based on the parameter values found in the Motor Setup Group see page 103 and on the estimated load on the motor R
112. This parameter contains a value representing the measured voltage at the AO analog out put 1 terminal as a percentage of the maximum output voltage For example if this param eter showed 50 then the voltage being output at AO would be 5 V DC 50 of 10 V DC the maximum value Range 0 100926 Default TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Control Modes Group Parameters AQ2 Level Read Only Address 0175 This parameter contains a value representing the measured current at the A1 analog out put 2 terminal as a percentage of the maximum output current For example if this param eter showed 25 then the process output current at A1 would be 5 mA DC if the current range was 0 to 20 mA DC or 8 mA DC if the current range was 4 to 20 mA DC The cur rent range is selected with parameter AQ2 Output Type see page 121 Range 0 100956 Default AINA Level Read Only Address 0264 AINB Level Read Only Address 0269 AINC Level Read Only Address 0274 These parameters contain a value representing the measured input signal at the A B or C terminal of the Analog Input Output Option Board as a percentage of the maximum input signal For example if terminal AINC was configured to range from 0 to 20 mA DC and the measured current was 5 mA then this parameter would show a value of 25 5 20 Range 0 100 Default AQA Level Read Only Address 0278 AGB Level Read
113. V ByuoD yoeqp 4 yoeqpes4 7299 8yuo2 je 1 3 O 1 L NIV 048 JOON ueg auod ROEK 0001 ggo AN DISV ued q K ke x ld 929 x uonesuedwo9 ules jul dis gess9 159 yed Cld SZ9 an JOjeJeuec dwey eJuelejey dlId 029 yu 01 ules dold 99 k ald 859 E xew 0 ndino 7 xh aid e49 1 5 euBis qur u amp iH Sous Cld ZS9 1013 Gld c29 adh 199 10 CRECEN Cld 1S9 Cld 029 ainByuod Cld 0S9 181 Figure 34 PID Controller Functional Diagram TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB Fundamentals of PID Control 182 Enabling PID control via a remote input A digital input or the Enter key when properly configured via the corresponding parameter may be used to toggle PID control Generally a remote input is used when the process will be operated as both a closed and an open loop and or when circumstances may arise where you would want to override the process speed as determined by the process variable and reference Remember to complete the implementation you must configure a remote input separately to invoke PID control 13
114. Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 41 Connections 42 TB4 TB4 CM CM EN Y EN D10 D10 D9 D9 D8 D8 D7 3 D7 2 D6 O PUR 5 D6 R ipod 5 D5 O oo 3 D5 oto e EE E D4 E D4 E D3 E D3 E D2 ronarc E D2 oTo OP 5 Di ojo E D1 Te Rn i 24 Y 24 24 O 24 24 Q or NC 24 or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 9 Example of Run Forward Run Reverse Control Active High Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information An input on D1 will cause the drive to begin running in the Forward direction provided the Enable circuit is closed Similarly an input on D5 in this example will cause the drive to begin running in the Reverse direction Note that if both inputs are active the Run Forward input has priority regardless of which one was activated first Jogging Operation The WF2 drive supports Jog operations for both 2 and 3 wire control Two jogging modes are available Run Jog DI or Pushbutton Jog with parameter Jog Mode selecting which is used See page 84 for information on this parameter Jogging operations are controlled by a digital input D2 to D10 for 2 wire control or D3 to D10 for 3 wire control with D3 being the default choice The selected digital input also needs to be configured for the type of jogging see the Digital Inputs Group
115. able to with stand a 150 overload for 60 s For maximum protection of the drive use the fuses listed in tables 13 14 and 15 found below and on the next page The recommended supplier is Bussman Model Number 208 V AC 230 V AC JJS JJN 1 JJS JJN 1 2S00 7x 10 2S01 5x 20 2S02 2x 30 2000 7x 10 6 2001 5x 15 10 2002 2x 20 15 2003 7x 30 25 2005 5x 40 35 2007 5x 50 40 2011 0x 70 60 2015 0x 70 60 2018 5x 2 2 2022 0x 2 2 Table 13 Recommended Fuses 230 V AC Models 1 For sizes up to and including 30 A KTK fuses may be substituted 2 Contact BERGES for further information Model Number 380 V AC 460 V AC JJS JJS 4000 7x 6 6 4001 5x 6 6 4002 2x 10 10 4003 7x 15 15 4005 5x 20 20 4007 5x 20 20 4011 0x 40 35 4015 0x 50 40 Table 14 Recommended Fuses 460 V AC Models 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 33 Connections iaces 380 V AC Maire JJS JJS 4018 5x 60 50 4022 0x 70 60 4030 0x 80 70 4037 0x 1 1 4045 0x 1 1 4055 0x 1 1 Table 14 Recommended Fuses 460 V AC Models 1 Contact BERGES for further information JJS 5000 7x 6 5001 5x 6 5002 2x 10 5003 7x 10 5005 5x 15 5007 5x 20 5011 0x 30 5015 0x 35 5018 5x 50 5022 0x 50 5030 0x 70 5037 0x
116. ablished after delivery must be notified to the transport company immediately Where necessary the supplier must also be notified before the damaged drive converter is put into operation The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with prEN 50178 4 Installation The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be in accordance with the specifications in the pertinent documentation The drive converters shall be protected against excessive strains In particular no compo nents must be bent or isolating distances altered in the course of transportation or handling No contact shall be made with electronic components and contacts Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive components which are liable to damage through improper use Electric components must not be mechanically damaged or de stroyed potential health risks 5 Electrical connection When working on live drive converters the applicable national accident prevention rules e g VBG 4 must be complied with The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant requirements e g cross sectional areas of conductors fusing GND connection For further information see documentation Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC requirements like screening earth ing location of filters and wiring are contained in the drive converter documentation They must always be complied with also for drive converters bearing a CE
117. acter Description Locked No of Assigned Function Memory Address Memory Address P V Figure 24 Standard Keypad Display for the Two Types of Parameters NOTE The display of the memory address is optional and by default is not shown Param eter Show Param sets whether the address is displayed see page 129 To program a parameter s value in Level 2 programming perform the following steps 1 Press SHIFT PROG to initiate Level 2 programming The Operate display will change to the list of parameters groups An arrowhead indi cates which one is selected 2 Ifthe desired parameter group is indicated by the arrowhead press ENTER to select the groups and display the parameters in that group If the indicated group is not the one you want to program use the up or down arrow keys to move the arrowhead to the de sired group and then press ENTER to select the group and display its parameters TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 97 Set up and Getting Started 3 If the desired parameter is indicated by the arrowhead press ENTER to select the pa rameter and display its current value If the indicated parameter is not the one you want to program use the up or down arrow keys to move the arrowhead to the desired pa rameter and then press ENTER to select the parameter and display its current value After the ENTER key is pressed the value for the parameter will be displayed Th
118. al Remote switching not enabled Local Mode Remote Mode Serial link is in complete control Serial link is in partial control Terminal strip if Local Remote switching not enabled Ref frequency set via terminal strip drive control via keypad Figure 27 Common Status Line for Displays in All Modes Except the Operate Mode When this mode is first entered the current value of parameter Output Freq will be shown To view the other parameter values use the down arrow key to scroll through the parame ters Of course you may use the up arrow key to return to a parameter shown earlier The Parameter Mode In the Parameter Mode you may configure the value of a parameter by scrolling This man ner of configuration is similar to that with the standard keypad You may access this mode by pressing SHIFT PAR F3 or by selecting Parameter Mode from the Menu Display Mode TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB 63 WF2 0 75 55 0 Set up and Getting Started keypad display windo LOC FORWARD F 20 00Hz 2 bot or y Output Load Shown only if keypad is the control source blank otherwise Output Frequency Mode F Running Forward R Running Reverse S Reference freq being set Drive is stopped 3 Letter Code for Control Path KST Keypad sets reference frequency drive control via terminal strip KYP Keypad if Local Remote switc
119. al input becomes true the status of bits 0 and 1 are ignored control via the serial link is halted and the selection of the control path reverts to parameter Terminal Keypad Method 2 Selection via Parameters Local Remote Local Config and Remote Config The second alternate method is to set the Local Remote parameter to a value other than None with the other values for this parameter being the means to switch between Local and Remote modes Once the means for switching modes is selected the current mode and the settings of parameters Local Config and Remote Config determine the control path Note that if you use this method for specifying control paths the SLO function is unavaila ble As described on page 86 where the Local Remote parameter is described three means are available to switch between Local and Remote modes L R by DI A digital input is configured to switch between Local and Remote modes When the digital input is open or false the drive is in Local mode when the digital input is closed or true the drive is in Remote mode L R by Fkey A function key on the enhanced keypad is configured to switch between Lo cal and Remote modes see parameters F1 Key Config through F4 Key Config on page 129 for more information L R by SerLnk Serial communication is used to switch between Local and Remote modes When Bit 10 of parameter Cntl Word 1 is set to 0 the drive is in Local mode when Bit 10 is set to 1 the drive is i
120. ameters for configuring the function keys of the enhanced keypad are modified to allow control of the Sequencer application 10 3 Parameters Added by the Application When the Sequencer application is loaded several new parameters in various groups be come available as well as a new parameter group called Seq Configure The following sec tions describe the new parameters and parameter group 10 3 4 Parameters Added to the Drive Status Group Two new parameters are made available at the end after the Freq Ref Ctrl parameter of the Drive Status group Seq Start Ctrl Read Only Address 3007 This parameter shows the source for start stop commands when the Sequencer application is running 0 Range varies Default 07 11 03 08_GB TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 147 Sequencer Application 0 Seq Configure Group Current Step Read Only Address 3003 This parameter shows the current step that is active Range 1 10 Default Step Time Min Read Only Address 3005 This parameter shows the length of time in minutes that the current step has been running Range 0 65535 min Default Step Time Sec Read Only Address 3006 This parameter shows the length of time in seconds that the current step has been run ning Range 0 60 s Default 10 3 2 Parameters Added to the Ramps Group 0 Two new parameters are inserted in the Ramps group between parameters Accel Ti
121. and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB 3 5 Control Features 07 11 03 08_GB Technical Characteristics A1 reference input 0to5VDC 0to10VDC 10 V DC 0 4 to 20 mA 50 Q or 250 Q load A2 reference input pulse train 0 to 5 V DC 0 to 10 V DC 0 4 to 20 mA 250 Q load or up to 100 kHz pulse train Reference voltage 10 V DC 10 mA maximum Digital inputs Off 0 to 3 V DC On 10 to 40 V DC for Active High mode of operation Digital supply output 24 V DC 100 mA DC maximum Preset frequencies 3 inputs for seven preset frequencies selectable Control output 2 SPDT relay outputs 130 V AC 1A 250 V AC 0 5 A 3 open collector outputs rated up to 90 mA DC per device 1 programmable pulse train with output proportional to frequency Analog output 1 voltage 0 to 10 V DC 2 mA DC maximum 1 current 0 4 to 20 mA Software adjustable programmable function Pulse train output Pulse train is proportional to output frequency and programmable to either 6 x 48 x 96 x or 3072 x the operating frequency of the drive DC injection braking Off or on with adjustable voltage 0 to 3096 adjustable time 0 to 10 ms or continuous activation by terminal strip or by frequency 0 to 60 Hz Torque limit Off or on adjustable from 5 to 15096 15096 of nominal torque May be enabled on start cycle or on start reference change
122. andardised line condi tions a loss of the inverter function can occur in extreme cases minimum operational qual ity This malfunction generally can be remedied with an inverter RESET TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 25 Connections 5 Connections A DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE e Read and understand this manual in its entirety before installing or operating the WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive Installation adjustment repair and maintenance of these drives must be performed by qualified personnel lt Disconnect all power before servicing the drive WAIT 5 MINUTES until the DC bus ca pacitors discharge Then measure the DC bus capacitor charge between the B and B terminals or DB1 and B terminals depending on model see page 31 for more in formation to verify that the DC voltage is less than 45 V DC The DC Bus LED is not a definitive indication of the absence of DC voltage DO NOT short across DC bus capacitors or touch unshielded components or terminal strip screw connections with voltage present Install all covers and close door before applying power or starting and stopping the drive The user is responsible for conforming to all applicable code requirements for ground ing all equipment Many parts in this drive including printed circuit boards operate at line voltage DO NOT TOUCH Use only electrically insulated tools Before servicing the electrical system Disconnect a
123. ange 250 250 Default Out Torque Nm Read Only Address 0039 This parameter shows the estimated torque being supplied to the motor in Newton meters Nm with precision equal to 0 1 Nm The estimation is based on the parameter values found in the Motor Setup Group see page 103 and on the estimated load on the motor Range varies Default Output Power Read Only Address 0029 This parameter shows the power being delivered to the motor which is derived from the parameter values of the Motor Setup group and the estimated load on the motor Range 0 250 Default Active Spd Ref Read Only Address 0031 This parameter shows the speed reference that is currently in use The source for the set ting of the speed reference may be from the keypad the terminal strip or the serial link de pending on the configuration of parameters Terminal Keypad see page 85 and Local Remote see page 86 Range 0 00 320 00 Hz Default TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 7 co Parameters 80 Drive Status Group Motor RPM Read Only Address 0033 This parameter contains the estimated current speed of the motor in revolutions per minute The estimation is based on the parameter values found in the Motor Setup Group see page 103 and on the estimated load on the motor Range 0 5000 RPM Default Start Stop Ctrl Read Only Address 0053 This parameter shows the active source for S
124. ange 0 105 Default 10096 AQ2 Output Type Address 0794 This parameter determines the current range output from terminal A1 The following func tions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function 0 20 mA The current range output from A1 is O to 20 mA 4 20mA The current range output from A1 is 4 to 20 mA Range see table Default 0 20 mA AQ2 Offset Address 0795 When parameter AQ2 Output Type see above is setto 4 20 mA this parameter adjusts the low end offset For example if the value of this parameter was set to 50 the range for A1 would start at 10 mA rather than 4 mA Range 0 100 Default 2096 AQA Configure Address 0275 AQB Configure Address 0279 These parameters configure what variable governs the output of analog output A or B of the Analog Input Output Option Board The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those for AQ1 Configure Range see AQ1 Configure Default AQA Calibrate Address 0276 AQB Calibrate Address 0280 These parameters are used to calibrate the output being sent from analog output A or B of the Analog Input Output Option Board For example configuring this parameter to 100 equals a 10 V full scale Range 0 105 Default 100 AQA Offset Address 0277 AQB Offset Address 0281 These parameters adjust the low end offset for analog output A or B of the Analog Input Output Option Board For example if the value
125. arameters A2 Span and A2 Offset may need to be adjusted to provide the desired drive performance TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Analog Inputs Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Display Function Range is 4 to 20 mA DC A fixed offset of 20 and span of 100 are 4 20 mA included with this selection Parameters A2 Offset and A2 Span may be used to refine input calibration Pls in 1kHz Up to 1 kHz pulse trains are accepted Pls in 5kHz Up to 5 kHz pulse trains are accepted Pls in 20kHz Up to 20 kHz pulse trains are accepted Pls in 100kHz Up to 100 kHz pulse trains are accepted Range see table Default Normal A2 Invert Address 0752 This parameter configures whether the signal being sent to terminal A21 is inverted that is whether the minimum input corresponds to the maximum frequency The following func tions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Normal Not inverted minimum input is minimum frequency Inverted Inverted minimum input is maximum frequency Range see table Default Normal A2 Span Address 0753 Provided parameter A2 Configure is not set to 4 20 mA this parameter is used to alter the range of the input being sent to terminal A21 For example with a 0 to 10 V DC input setting this parameter to a value of 50 alters the range to O to 5 V DC If parameter A2 Config
126. are in English Espanol Displays are in Spanish Italiano Displays are in Italian Deutsch Displays are in German 0 Range see table Show Param Default English Address 0961 This parameter allows you to display the memory address of a parameter in the standard keypad display window see figure 24 on page 57 The following functions may be as signed to this parameter Display Function Disabled Memory addresses are not shown in the keypad display Enabled Memory addresses are shown in the keypad display 0 Range see table F1 Key Config F2 Key Config F3 Key Config F4 Key Config Default Disabled Address 0961 Address 0962 Address 0963 Address 0964 These parameters allow you to configure the function performed by the function keys found on the enhanced keypad MON F1 OPR F2 PAR F3 DIR F4 The following functions may be assigned to these parameters Display Function The function key does not perform any special functions although it Pi abied will when used with the SHIFT key navigate to the named mode Este The function key acts as a toggle switch between Local and Remote modes The function key acts as a toggle switch to switch the control path bet Term Kpd ween the terminal strip and the keypad PID Enable The function key enables PID control SL Override The function key overrides serial link control
127. ation available by enabling the Seq Con figure parameter group and re configuring other parameters to support the Sequencer application See section 10 on page 146 for more infor mation Sequencer 0 Range Default Program Number Address 0983 This parameter allows you to perform special operations on the WF2 drive The following data codes may be assigned to this parameter Displayed Code Special Operation 10 Resets the Elapsed Runtime parameter to zero 20 Resets the Elapsed MWh parameter to zero 0 Range Default 7 23 Communication Group 07 11 03 08_GB This group provides parameters for utilizing Modbus or DeviceNet protocol for serial link communications It also provides access to status parameters so you may check on a drive s performance as well as the external frequency references for the drive Finally for troubleshooting the actual control words being written over the serial link may be viewed by reading the control word found in this parameter group Note that the status and control words are represented by four hexadecimal values which are then translated to binary values see chapter 12 on page 179 The binary values are then compared to the bit positions to derive status information The significance of each bit is indicated in the table below For example you might write hexadecimal value 0013 for Cntl Word 1 Translated to a bi nary value this
128. be assigned to this parameter Display Function None Slip compensation is not utilized The drive calculates how much slip compensation is needed depend Automatic ing on the load and motor speed 0 Range see table Default None V Boost Config Address 0553 This parameter sets the amount of boost expressed as a percentage of nominal motor volt age to be applied at zero frequency The amount configured then tapers linearly as fre quency increases reaching zero at the point specified by parameters Boost Taper Frq and Boost Taper VIt The default values are model dependent Model Number Default Model Number Default Model Number Default WF2K2S00 7x 2 0 WF2K4000 7x 2 0 WF2K5000 7x 2 0 WF2K2S01 5x 1 5 WF2K4001 5x 1 5 WF2K5001 5x 1 5 WF2K2S02 2x 1 5 WF2K4002 2x 1 5 WF2K5002 2x 1 5 WF2K2000 7x 2 0 WF2K4003 7x 1 5 WF2K5003 7x 1 5 WF2K2001 5x 1 5 WF2K4005 5x 1 0 WF2K5005 5x 1 0 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 102 Motor Setup Group Parameters Model Number Default Model Number Default Model Number Default WF2K2002 2x 1 5 WF2K4007 5x 1 0 WF2K5007 5x 1 0 WF2K2003 7x 1 5 WF2K401 1 0x 1 0 WF2K5011 0x 1 0 WF2K2005 5x 1 096 WF2K4015 0x 1 0 WF2K5015 0x 1 096 WF2K2007 5x 1 096 WF2K4018 5x 0 5 WF2K5018 5x 0 5 WF2K2011 0x 1 0 WF2K4022 0x 0 5 WF2K5022 0x 0 5 WF
129. ble Default 2 Wire Start Mode Address 0402 This parameter allows you to select whether the drive will automatically start when line pow er is applied if a Run command is active from the terminal strip The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Line Start Lock Out The drive will not automatically start when line Line Str L power is applied and a Run command is active Instead a new Run command must be given The drive will automatically start when line power is applied and a Run Auto Start A command is active Range see table Default Line Str L Stop Mode Address 0403 This parameter allows you to configure whether a ramp to stop or a coast to stop occurs when a Stop command is issued In a ramp to stop the drive remains operational and may assist in the stopping In coast to stop the drive turns off when the Stop command occurs and the load stops at a rate determined by friction and inertia Instead of these two types of stopping you may specify that direct current be applied just before the shaft stops turning zero speed The length of time that direct current is applied is set by parameter DC Inj Time Stp see page 109 Note that if DC Inj Time Stp is set to zero braking continues until the EN enable input is toggled The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Rmp to Stp A ramp to stop is pe
130. bove the value set in pa 9 rameter Al High Thres n The frequency input to analog input 2 goes below the value set in pa Al2 Low rameter Al Low Thres n AI2 Hiah The frequency input to analog input 2 goes above the value set in pa 9 rameter Al High Thres n Either the signal input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in pa Al1L AI1H rameter Al Low Thres n or above that set in parameter Al High Thres n DHO AHL Either digital input D10 set to Step Change or the input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in parameter Al Low Thres n DI9 AI2H Either digital input D9 set to Step Change or the input to analog input 2 goes above the value set in parameter Al High Thres n Function key F1 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F1 Key Config F1 Key must also be set to Step Change Function key F2 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F2 Key Config F2 Key must also be set to Step Change Function key F3 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F3 Key Config F3 Key must also be set to Step Change Function key F4 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F4 Key Config F4 Key must also be set to Step Change Enter Key The Enter key Parameter Enter Key must also be setto Step Change Time After the duration specified by parameters Seq Time min n and Seq Time sec n DI6 Time Either digital input D6 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DI7 Time Either digital input D7 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses TB Wood s and Berges
131. c 1 3014 Seq Time sec 2 3034 Seq Time sec 3 3054 Seq Time sec 4 3074 Seq Time sec 5 3094 SeqTime sec 6 3114 pers os i Seq Time sec 7 3134 Seq Time sec 8 3154 Seq Time sec 9 3174 Seq Time sec 10 3194 Ramp Select 1 3015 Ramp Select 2 3035 Ramp Select 3 3055 Ramp Select 4 3075 Main Ramps 0 Ramp Select 5 3095 ARTATI AR2 2 Main Ramps 151 Ramp Select 6 3115 AR3 3 Ramp Select 7 3135 ARA 4 Ramp Select 8 3155 Ramp Select 9 3175 Ramp Select 10 3195 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 175 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory Parameter Name Address Range Default See Page User Setting Go Next Step 1 Go Next Step 2 Go Next Step 3 Go Next Step 4 Go Next Step 5 Go Next Step 6 Go Next Step 7 Go Next Step 8 Go Next Step 9 Go Next Step 10 3016 3036 3056 3076 3096 3116 3136 3156 3176 3196 Disabled 0 DI6 1 DI7 2 DI8 3 DI9 4 DI10 5 Al1 Low 6 Al1 High 7 Al2 Low 8 AI2 High 9 AML AMHA 10 DI10 Al1L 11 DI9 AI2H 12 F1 Key 13 F2 Key 14 F3 Key 15 F4 Key 16 Enter Key 17 Time 18 DI6 Time DI7 Time DI8 Time DI9 Time DI10 Time 23 AliL Time 24 Al2H Time 25 F1 Time 26 F2 Time 27 19 20 21 22 23 24 Disabled 152 176 Table 32 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB Summary of WF2 Pa
132. ccess Mode The Menu Display Mode This section describes each of the modes and the displays that are shown for each Note that while each display is specially tailored to the mode in which its shown the fourth line of the display is common to all modes except the Operate Mode The fourth line shows status information drive status output frequency and active control source Figure 27 on page 63 shows the fourth line of the display along with the codes that may appear on this line and what each means The Operate Mode The Operate Mode is the primary mode of the enhanced keypad The keypad automatically enters this mode after power up and a short delay In this mode operational information about the WF2 drive is displayed From this mode you may branch to other modes either via the Menu Display Mode or by pressing one of the navigation keys on the keypad To return to this mode from other modes press SHIFT OPR F2 Figure 28 on page 64 shows a sample display of the Operate Mode along with the various codes that may be displayed and what each means The Monitor Mode In Monitor Mode you may observe the value of selected parameters while the WF2 drive is running This mode is activated by pressing SHIFT MON F1 or by navigating to this mode from the Menu Display Mode The parameters that may be monitored are as follows Output Freq Output Current Drive Temp Out Torque Active Spd Ref lt Output Voltage TB Wood s
133. ce for possible ship ping damage Upon receipt 1 Remove the drive from its package and inspect exterior for shipping damage If damage is apparent notify the shipping agent and your sales representative 2 Remove the cover and inspect the drive for any apparent damage or foreign objects En sure that all mounting hardware and terminal connection hardware is properly seated securely fastened and undamaged 3 Read the technical data label affixed to the drive and ensure that the correct horsepower and input voltage for the application has been purchased 4 f you will store the drive after receipt place it in its original packaging and store in a clean dry place free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes where the ambient temper ature is not less than 20 C 4 F or greater than 65 C 149 F Z CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Do not operate or install any drive that appears damaged Failure to observe this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage 4 2 Installation Precautions Improper installation of the WF2 drive will greatly reduce its life Be sure to observe the fol lowing precautions when selecting a mounting location Failure to observe these precau tions may void the warranty lt Do not install the drive in a place subjected to high temperature high humidity exces sive vibration corrosive gases or liquids or airborne dust or metallic particles See sec tion 3 3 on page 12
134. cer Application Fixed Freq n Address See chapter 11 When parameter Freq Config n is set to Spd Fixed this parameter specifies the frequency Range 0 00 320 00 Hz Default 0 Hz Dir Control n Address See chapter 11 This parameter sets the direction of rotation for step n of the Sequencer application The following directions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Stop The shaft does not turn Forward The shaft turns in the Forward direction Reverse The shaft turns in the Reverse direction Range see table Default Stop Seq Time min n Address See chapter 11 If parameter Go Next Step n or Goto X Step n uses a time duration either alone or in com bination with other criteria see pages 152 and 153 this parameter sets the number of min utes that step n will run partial minutes are set with the following parameter Range 0 65535 min Default 0 min Seq Time sec n Address See chapter 11 If parameter Go Next Step n or Goto X Step n uses a time duration either alone or in com bination with other criteria see pages 152 and 153 this parameter sets the number of sec onds in addition to the number of minutes configured in parameter Seq Time min n that step n will run Range 0 60 s Default O s Ramp Select n Address See chapter 11 This parameter configures the acceleration and deceleration ramps for step n of the Se quencer application The following may be assigned to this
135. code number See table 29 on page 141 for a list of fault descriptions and codes as well as suggestions for recovering from the fault condi tion A typical display would appear as follows Fault Hist 1 Motor Overload F20 RDY 10 00Hz KYP Upload Download Mode For MCP software revisions of 3 71 or greater and enhanced keypads with software revi sion 4 00 or greater an enhanced keypad EKP may be used to store a complete param eter set from a WF2 drive This becomes particularly useful when using an enhanced key pad as a hand held controller programmer To use this facility the customer s parameter set must first be stored in the WF2 via param eter Param STO RCL The customer set of parameters may then be uploaded to the EKP for transport to another WF2 drive To upload the parameter set perform the following steps 1 On the EKP press the MENU button 2 Use the cursor to navigate to the keypad setup screen 3 Press ENT 4 Highlight the option entitled UPLoad EEPROM which is the upload parameter 5 Press the ENT key twice to execute the upload operation During the transfer the dis play looks like this DRV gt gt gt gt EKP When the upload completes successfully line 3 of the keypad will show STORED and line 4 will provide a BERGES application number such as w01V131 If the upload is not successful the display will indicate Flash Prog Error You may now connect the EKP
136. consult with BERGES for further information The input signal may be 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 5 V DC or 0 4 to 20 mA DC The burden for this terminal can only be 250 Q See table 18 on page 39 for more information A potentiometer with a minimum value of 1 kQ may be used for this input DPQ formerly 6FS Open collector pulse train output The output from this terminal is the drive s output frequency multiplied by 6 default 48 96 or 3072 as set by param eter DPQ Scaling see page 118 Output is 50 duty cycle and may be used with voltages up to 24 V DC A5kQ pull up resistor may be necessary in some installations contact BERGES for details DQ1 to DQ3 Digital outputs 1 through 3 These are open collectors with external pull up resistors Each output is capable of sinking up to 90 mA DC They require power to operate either 24 V DC from the drive or 10 V DC to 35 V DC from an external power supply They are configured by parameters DQ1 Config ure default setting is Drive Rdy DQ2 Configure default setting is At Speed and DQ3 Configure default setting is Run Rev see page 117 for more information TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved Table 17 Description of WF2 Control Terminals 37 WF2 0 75 55 0 Connections Terminal Description TB2 Terminal Block RCA Common terminal for the first auxiliary relay The function of the relay is set by parameter R1 Configure
137. cted Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 40 00 Hz TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Skip Freq Group Parameters Preset Speed 6 Address 0360 This parameter sets the sixth of seven preset speed The speed is selected by a combi nation of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is selected Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 50 00 Hz Preset Speed 7 Address 0362 This parameter sets the seventh last preset speed The speed is selected by a combina tion of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is selected 0 Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 60 00 Hz 7 11 Skip Freq Group 07 11 03 08_GB This group contains parameters that allow you to configure up to five frequency bands that are skipped during drive operation The WF2 drive will not establish a steady state at any frequency within a skip band instead it will ramp through the band Skip 1 Low Lim Address 0480 This parameter sets the lower frequency of the first frequency band to be skipped Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 1 Hi Lim Address 0481 This parameter sets the upper frequency of the first frequency band to be skipped Range Skip 1 Low Lim to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz Skip 2 Low Lim
138. d Dissipation for Models Entirely Inside an Enclosure 1 Dissipation at rated current and maximum switching frequency 20 WF2 0 75 55 0 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 08 GB Installation WF2 Model Watts WF2 Model Watts WF2 Model Watts WF2K Dissipated WF2K Dissipated WF2K Dissipated 2S00 7x 19 4000 7x 20 5000 7x 20 2S01 5x 20 4001 5x 21 5001 5x 21 2502 2x 27 4002 2x 27 5002 2x 27 2000 7x 19 4003 7x 30 5003 7x 30 2001 5x 20 4005 5x 36 5005 5x 33 2002 2x 27 4007 5x 40 5007 5x 39 2003 7x 29 4011 0x 46 5011 0x 43 2005 5x 36 4015 0x 50 5015 0x 44 2007 5x 34 4018 5x 75 5018 5x 73 2011 0x 68 4022 0x 76 5022 0x 78 2015 0x 73 4030 0x 80 5030 0x 82 2018 5x 135 4037 0x 134 5037 0x 135 2022 0x 137 4045 0x 145 5045 0x 143 4055 0x 150 5055 0x 152 Table 7 Required Dissipation When Fins Are External to the Enclosure 4 4 Maintenance Environmental Integrity 07 11 03 08_GB 4 4 1 Removal of the Conduit Plate on NEMA 1 1P31 Models NEMA 1 IP31 models may be used in an expanded ambient temperature range if the con duit plate on the bottom of the unit is removed Once the conduit plate is removed 230 and 460 V AC models of 22 kW or less may be used where ambient temperatures range from 0 to 55 32 to 131 F while 460 V AC models of 30 kW or greater and all 575 V AC models may be used where ambient temperatures range from 0
139. ddress 0653 This parameter configures the short term response of the drive to incremental change in the feedback signal The range of this parameter is 0 to 1000 corresponding to 0 0 to 100 0 of the maximum frequency 0 Range 0 2000 Default 0 PID Int Gain Address 0654 This parameter sets the long term response of the drive to a change in the feedback signal This is sometimes called averaging time By setting this parameter appropriately the drive may be calibrated to ignore short term perturbations seen in the transducer signal that may be considered either noise or insig nificant while still responding to longer term effects reflected in the signal The range of this parameter is 0 to 1000 with 0 being inactive and 1000 being the quickest response time 0 Range 0 10000 Default 0 PID Deriv Gain Address 0655 This parameter sets the gain of the derivative term in the drive s response to changes in the feedback input The range of this parameter is O to 1000 with O being inactive and 1000 being maximum derivative gain UNSTABLE OPERATION Changing the value of this parameter to a number greater than 0 may result in unstable op eration Since most applications only require integral feedback conditioning not derivative feedback conditioning which is accomplished with this parameter adjustment of this pa rameter should only be performed by experienced personnel and with great care Failure to observe t
140. e 12 Example of Connections for Forward and Reverse Jogging Active High Logic NOTE Inputs D3 to D10 are programmable see page 111 for configuration information Preset Speeds The WF2 drive supports up to seven preset speeds which are in addition to the reference speed of the drive The preset speeds may be selected by using digital inputs or serial com munication to set bits 5 6 and 7 of Cntl Word 1 see page 133 for information on this pa rameter Figure 13 shows an example of connections for seven preset speeds using three digital inputs If digital inputs are used the number of preset speeds available is determined by the number of digital inputs assigned this functionality If three digital inputs are used all seven preset speeds are available ftwo digital inputs are used only Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 and Preset Speed 3 are available lt If only one digital input is used only Preset Speed 1 is available See parameters D2 Configure through D10 Configure on pages 110 through 113 for more information on assigning digital inputs to selection of preset speeds The preset speeds are configured by parameters Preset Speed 1 to Preset Speed 7 found in the Preset Speeds parameter group see page 96 for more information on the Preset Speeds Group Note that the speeds are in addition to the reference speed of the drive and that when selected they only change the active reference speed not the actual speed of the
141. e 3 Parameter EMOP Ramp Time becomes MWh Tife AQ2 Level RB Stat Ramp Ref F Ace Dec Time evel atus amp Ref Frq i Format 4 Parameter Jog Accel Time be comes Jog P P P Page 81 Page 83 Page 83 Page 95 Acc Dec Figure 31 Arrangement of WF2 Parameters First 11 Groups 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 157 Summary of WF2 Parameters i Anal Faul Motor Setup Digital Inputs H Analog Inputs Outputs asoma Nom Mtr A A Dai T AQ1 Man Fault Param STO Comm MN Po Current Pa aati yia ar apes age Configure Configure Reset Display wy RCL Protocol Configure Page 104 9 9 e Page 117 Page 120 Page 122 2 Page 130 Page 131 Page 136 Nom Mtr mM o DQ2 AQ1 Input Phase User Units inati Comm EPID Direct Voltage DRESS s Configure Pa eta Configure Calibrate Fit Mult applicata Baudrate Type Page 104 g Page 110 g Page 118 Page 120 Page 122 Page 128 g Page 13
142. e Form 1021 for further instructions on installing and using a DB unit 5 5 2 User Supplied External Resistor Rather than using a dynamic braking unit to increase braking capacity an external resistor supplied by the user may be used The drive may be configured to protect the external resistor by entering the resistor s value thermal resistance and thermal capacitance into parameters DB Res Value DB Cth Val ue and DB Rth Value see page 107 for the default values and additional information on these parameters The thermal specifications for the external resistor can be obtained from the resistor s manufacturer Table 16 provides the minimum DB resistance for each model To use an external resistor first disconnect the internal DB resistor and properly terminate the wires leading to it Then connect the external resistor to the B and DB or DB1 and DB terminals the terminals are labeled differently depending on the horsepower rating of the drive see page 31 for more information Finally set parameter DB Config to Ext DB Res and configure the DB Res Value DB Cth Value and DB Rth Value parameters for the external resistor used Min DB Peak Min DB Peak Min DB Peak Vica Resistor Power EDS Resistor power REI Resistor Bower Q kW Q kW Q kW 1S00 7x 56 3 4000 7x 120 5 5000 7x 160 6 2S00 7x 56 3 4001 5x 120 5 5001 5x 160 6 2S01 5x 56 3 4002
143. e Format is 53 The value of the MWh Lifetime parameter cannot be reset Range 0 65535 MWh Lifetime Default Range 51 52 or 53 MWh Life Format Default Elapsed MWh Read Only Address 0896 MWh Format Read Only Address 0897 These parameters work together to display the amount of power that the WF2 drive has consumed since parameter Elapsed MWh was reset When this parameter is read from a keypad the display will show the amount of power consumed properly formatted However when the parameter is read via serial communication you must also read parameter MWh Format to properly format the value To format the value divide the value shown for pa rameter Elapsed MWh by 10 if parameter MWh Format is 51 100 if parameter MWh Format is 52 or 1000 if parameter MWh Format is 53 The Elapsed MWh parameters value may be reset by setting parameter Program Range 0 65535 Elapsed MWh Default Range 51 52 or 53 MWh Format Default 7 6 Input Status Group 07 11 03 08 GB This parameter group provides status information about the various inputs to the drive D1 Status Read Only Address 0150 D2 Status Read Only Address 0151 D3 Status Read Only Address 0152 D4 Status Read Only Address 0153 D5 Status Read Only Address 0154 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 81 Parameters 82 Input Status Group D6 Status Read Only Address 0155 D7 Status Read Only
144. e WF2 drive uses two types of parameters One type is assigned a numerical value while the second type is assigned a function See figure 24 for how the two types of parameters are displayed 4 If the parameter is unlocked use the up or down arrow keys to change the parameter s value to the desired value 5 Press ENTER to save the new value If you do not wish to save the new value press SHIFT to return to the list of parameters or PROG to return to the Operate mode 6 The list of parameters will now be shown You may select another parameter or you may return to the list of parameter groups by pressing SHIFT If you are finished pro gramming and wish to return to the Operate mode press PROG Active Fault Warning and Fault History Mode When a fault or warning occurs the Operate mode automatically changes to the Active Fault mode The drive stores up to three active faults or warnings and provides a separate display for each Figure 25 provides a sample display for an active fault Display for Active Faults and Warnings Display for Fault History Indicates which display is shown Indicates which display is shown 1 denotes the first most recent fault or warning 3 denotes the oldest fault H3 FAULT 12 Al FAULT 12 GROUND FAULT GROUND FAULT Name of fault or warning Name of fault or warning Figure 25 Display for Active Faults and Warnings Once the active fault display is shown you must correct the condi
145. e assigned to this parameter Display Function The drive will not automatically reset and re start it must be reset man Disabled ually Enabled The drive will automatically reset and attempt to re start Range see table Default Disabled OC Auto Reset Address 0867 When an overcurrent OC fault is detected this parameter configures whether the fault is automatically reset or whether a manual reset will be required See the discussion of auto matic resetting and re starting found under parameter OV Auto Reset page 124 for more information The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function The drive will not automatically reset and re start it must be reset man Disabled ually Enabled The drive will automatically reset and attempt to re start Range see table Default Disabled OT Auto Reset Address 0868 When an overtemperature OT fault is detected that is the temperature exceeds the value set in parameter Drive Temp Trip see page 77 this parameter configures whether the fault is automatically reset or whether a manual reset will be required See the discussion of automatic resetting and re starting found under parameter OV Auto Reset page 124 for more information The following data codes may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Fault Management Group
146. e caused by insulation failure in the mo load tor or the cables Checkthe motor and cabling for shorts to ground 12 Input Phase Loss Current measurement detected an input Check input power cables phase with no current 13 Overvoltage The voltage of the internal DC link has ex Adjust deceleration time ceeded 135 of the nominal voltage This e Add dynamic braking module may be caused by incorrect deceleration time or high overvoltage spikes on line 14 Under Voltage The DC bus voltage fell below 65 of the Reset fault and attempt to restart Check nominal voltage This may be due to line the line for proper supply If fault persists supply failure or internal failure of the an internal fault has occurred contact drive BERGES 15 IDB Cret Failure The dynamic brake DB is overloaded Check for an open DB resistor e Check for a shorted DB transistor Consult BERGES Table 29 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 141 Troubleshooting Pn Fault Name Possible Cause s How to Recover 16 Motor Over Temp The drive s motor temperature model de Decrease motor loading If the motor is not Fault tected motor overheating severe enough overheated check the temperature model to cause a fault parameters 17 Output Fault The output sensor detected an error Check motor wiring lt Check for and remove any capacitive load lt Check the motor and cabli
147. e is ready to be reflashed see chapter 6 2 5 Upgrading 9 Firmware by Reflashing page 59 POWER Continuous The drive is powered up 6 2 5 Upgrading Firmware by Reflashing The firmware of the WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive can be upgraded by a process called re flashing This allows the latest features to be implemented in existing hardware For more information on this capability refer to Form 1232 Reflash Procedures for the E trAC WF2 Series Sensorless Vector Drive This section is for those users who would like to get up and running quickly without exten sive research through this manual For a quick start follow these steps 1 Read sections 5 1 through 5 4 as well as 6 1 and 6 2 before proceeding In many cases your drive will perform perfectly without making any changes to the fac tory settings The factory setting is for the drive to run a typical NEMA B induction motor to a maximum speed of 60 00 Hz with acceleration and deceleration times of 3 s The jog frequency is Set for 5 0 Hz The REV key on the keypad is disabled Perform all procedures for installation as specified in section 4 Double check that the proper voltage is available for the drive before applying power Apply AC power to the input terminals For approximately 1 s the display will indicate the model number of the unit along with the MCP software revision number If an enhanced keypad is connected to the unit the sof
148. e of the overtemperature trip point param eter Drive Temp Trip see page 77 which is the temperature at which an overtemperature fault will be generated 0 corresponds to 20 C 4 F and 10096 corresponds to parameter Drive Temp Trip Range 0 100976 Default 10096 Low Freq Thres Address 0841 This parameter sets the low frequency threshold Range 0 0 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 0 Hz TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 11 co Parameters Analog Outputs Group Address 0283 Address 0284 RA Configure RB Configure These parameters configure what action or state causes output relay A or B of the Analog Input Output Option Board to become active The functions that may be assigned to these parameters are the same as those that may be assigned to parameter DQ1 Configure see page 117 for the available functions 0 Range see DQ1 Configure Default 7 19 Analog Outputs Group 120 This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the functions of the analog out puts found in control terminal group TB1 see figure 6 on page 36 AQ1 Configure Address 0790 This parameter configures what variable governs the output of analog output 1 terminal AO The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Range Limit Not Assigned Analog output 1 is not used Motor Spd Speed of the attached motor Parameter Maximum Freq
149. e when ke ula adhan Sequencer application loaded AINB Span row Proq DB Fit AR fl Pan Page 116 Page 119 Page 126 Page 139 1 Parameter modified when A Sequencer application AINB Fil a PD loaded the number refers to Tee Loss Ref AR D Part the notes shown below Page 116 Page 126 Page 139 AINC Invert Ext Fit AR NOTES Page 116 Page 127 When the Sequencer application is loaded 5 Bits 10 and 11 switch Local Remote mode AINC Offset Mtr Ovid AR o A Page 116 Page 127 and switch Terminal Strip Keypad as con trol source are inactivated 6 Bit 0 ceases to enable PID control and in ANG Span stead turns the application on and off Also Page 116 bits 13 and 14 DeviceNet timeout fault and warning are inactivated ANG er 7 Bit 10 drive in Remote mode is inactivat Page 116 ed Figure 32 Arrangement of WF2 Parameters Remaining 11 Groups TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 158 WF2 0 75 55 0 08_GB Seq Summary of WF2 Parameters Seq Enable Page 148 Seq Run Source Page 149 Seq Pause Page 149 Seq Reset Page 149 Freq Config 1 Freq Config 2 Freq Config 3 Freq Config 4 F
150. ed reference is set by the binary word consisting of D3 through D10 with D3 being the least significant bit and D10 the most significant bit All digital inputs must be properly configured for proper function If a digital input is not configured that input is considered inactive 0 8Bit DI PS The output frequency is computed by using the following formula to convert the 8 bit binary word 8bbw in the formula into a decimal val ue Output Frequency 8bbw x Max Frequency Mir Frequency Spd R1 R3 The summation of references 1 and 3 0 Range see table TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved Default Spd Rf 2 89 WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters 90 Speed Reference Group Jog Ref Config Address 0803 This parameter configures the reference speed for jogging operations As with the setting of the main reference speed for the drive an analog input may be used to control jogging speed Display Function Spd Hf 1 Reference 1 Spd Rf 2 Reference 2 Spd Rf 3 Reference 3 Spd R1 R2 The summation of references 1 and 2 Spd R1 R3 The summation of references 1 and 3 S R1 R2 R3 The summation of all references Spd R2 R3 The summation of references 2 and 3 S R14k R2 Reference 2 is scaled by factor k and then summed with reference 1 The value of k is set by parameter Set k Factor see page 92 Spd R1 R2 The difference between references
151. el 1 Programming Standard Keypad Only TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 1 96 WF2 0 75 55 0 08_GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Drive Output r CSa N r dL 4 p l c an au Access Level Drive Type Output Freq D1 Status AN NG bg Minum Accel Time 11 Prese ee e ee Current Limit Torque Type Page 76 Page 76 i Page 78 Page 81 J Page 83 Page 88 i 1 Page 92 1 i Page 96 E Page 97 Page 98 Page 101 Enter Catalog 4 Output 1 T Maximum ro a Tina 4 preset Speed TT Trq Limit Password Number Voltage cher ros bey Fre i Desa Tias l i 2 gon e Sr Type eae 105 Page 75 Page 76 Page 78 g 4 g r Page 89 M AS CENE Page 96 4 Page 98 n Lau Set Password Serial No 1 Suput D3 Status Stop Mode Mani peca Accel Time 2 Prese Lapsed Skip 2 Low Trg Ee Mtr Auto Carrier Page 76 Page 77 Page78 Page 81 J Page 84 Page 89 Page 92 i Page 96 i Page 97 Page 99 Page 102
152. er application New parameters become available while other parameters are no longer needed and cease to be displayed In addition the functionality of some param eters is modified to support the application Note that the values of all parameters are reset to the factory defaults when the Sequencer application is loaded Once the application is loaded by changing the value of parameter Application setting the value of the Seq Enable parameter to Always turns the application on permanently Alter nately you may elect to turn the sequencer application on and off as needed by using a digital input function key if an enhanced keypad is connected to the WF2 drive or remote communication via the serial link Once the application is turned on it may be run via input from the keypad or the terminal strip Once running it may be paused at a particular step by using a digital input function key if an enhanced keypad is connected to the WF2 drive or remote communication via the serial link These means may also be used to reset the application The digital input and function key forms of control may also be used to force the sequencer to move from one step to the next if automated stepping is not desired If automated step ping is desired each step may be configured to start when the input signal on either analog input 1 or analog input 2 crosses a high or low threshold a certain amount of time has elapsed or a combination of these criteria
153. er time for the analog input signal being sent to the A B or C analog input terminal of the Analog Input Output Option Board Longer filter times better re duce noise disturbances but may slow the signal response time Range 1 1000 ms Default 5 ms TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Digital Outputs Group Parameters 7 18 Digital Outputs Group This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the functions of the digital out puts and output relays found in control terminal groups TB1 TB2 and TB3 see figure 6 on page 36 In addition this group contains parameters which configure the various thresh olds of the drive DQ1 Configure Address 0770 This parameter configures what action or state causes digital output 1 terminal DQ1 to be come active true note that only Active High pull up logic is available The following func 0 Range see table 07 11 03 08_GB tions may be assigned Display Function Not Assign Digital output 1 is not used Drive Run Drive enters Run mode Run Fwd Drive is running in Forward Run Rev Drive is running in Reverse Drive Rdy Drive is powered up but not running At Speed Drive has reached reference speed Drv Flted A fault occurs Drv NotFIt A fault has not occurred Kpd in Ctl dad is the control path for reference speed and control f
154. ere enough to cause a fault 54 Motor Underload The load on the motor is insufficient but Check the motor and load Warning not so low that a fault occurs 55 Comm Timeout No communication has occurred in the Reset and restore communication See the Fault specified amount of time and a fault oc communication option manual for further curs information 56 Comm Timeout No communication has occurred in the Reset and restore communication See the Warning specified amount of time and a fault oc communication option manual for further curs information 57 Network Ext Fault The external communication network de Reset and restore DeviceNet communica livered a command to the drive that is forc tion ing a system wide error 58 Ser Lnk TimeOut The programmed value of parameter Reset and restore serial link communica Warning Comm Timeout see page 132 was ex tions ceeded 59 Regen Timeout After a Stop command the drive has been Re adjust regenerative torque limit para operating in regenerative current limit for a meters or add dynamic braking capacity to time period in excess of the setting of pa the drive rameter Regen Timeout 60 DC Volt Calibr DC voltage is outside of normal limits on e Check line voltage Warning power up This may be caused by lt Check the setting of the Supply Volt High or low line voltage age parameter see page 106 The Supply Voltage parameter is in correctly set Tab
155. erial link PID Enable Enables PID control FIt Reset Resets a fault Ext Fault Monitor for an external fault Note that you must a configure param eter External Fault to generate a warning or fault see page 122 0 Range see table Default Stop D3 Configure Address 0705 When the Sequencer application is not turned on that is parameter Application is not set to Sequencer this parameter configures what function is performed by the D3 terminal When the Sequencer application is turned on D3 is set to Seq Enable and cannot be changed The following functions may be assigned to this parameter when the Sequencer application is not turned on Display Function Not Assign No input on terminal D3 Forward Command the Forward direction Stop Command a Stop Jog Start jogging operation Reverse Command the Reverse direction Jog Revers Start jogging operation in Reverse PS In 1 Set reference to Preset Speed 1 PS In 2 Set reference to Preset Speed 2 PS In 43 Set reference to Preset Speed 3 Alt Rmp 1 Activate Alternate Ramp 1 Alt Rmp 2 Activate Alternate Ramp 2 EMOP Spd EMOP increase speed EMOP Spd EMOP decrease speed T K Switch Switch from terminal strip to keypad control L R Switch Switch from Local to Remote mode DC Inject Begin DC injection braking Torque Lim Activate Torque Limit mode SL Override Takes control away from the serial l
156. ers the range to 0 to 5 V DC If parameter A1 Configure is set to 4 20 mA the setting of this parameter is ignored NOTES The minimum difference between offset and span will be limited to 10 If offset is set to a value greater than span zero speed output will result Range 0 0 200 096 Default 100 096 A1 Offset Address 0744 Provided parameter A1 Configure is not set to 4 20 mA this parameter is used to alter the starting value of the input being sent to terminals A11 and A12 analog input 1 For exam ple with a 0 to 10 V DC input setting this parameter to a value of 10 alters the range to 1to 10 V DC If parameter A1 Configure is set to 4 20 mA the setting of this parameter is ignored NOTE The minimum difference between offset and span will be limited to 10 If offset is set to a value greater than span zero speed output will result Range 0 0 100 096 Default 0 096 A1 Filter Time Address 0745 This parameter sets the filter time for the analog input signal to terminals A11 and A12 Longer filter times better reduce noise disturbances but may slow the signal response time Range 1 1000 ms Default 5 ms A2 Configure Address 0751 This parameter configures what type of signal is being sent to terminal A21 analog input 2 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Signal is not altered Note that a 4 20 mA DC signal may be input with Normal this selection but p
157. es a 2 line by 16 character display The display varies by the mode in which the drive is placed which may be Operate Mode Programming Mode e Active Faults and Fault History Mode The displays for these modes will be described in the following sections Note that the default language used for displays is English This may be changed by setting parameter Language to a different value See page 128 for information on this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 55 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Set up and Getting Started keypad display window 3 Letter Code for Control Path KST Keypad sets ref frequency drive control via terminal strip KYP Keypad if Local Remote switching not enabled LOC Local Mode REM Remote Mode LC Serial link is in complete control LP Serial link is in partial control RM Terminal strip if Local Remote switching not enabled SK Ref frequency set via terminal strip drive control via keypad S S Status of the Drive Listed in order from highest to lowest priority if more than one status is active the higher priority status is displayed FAULTED Drive is faulted AUTO RESET A fault occurred that may be auto reset NO DRV EN No drive enable NOT READY Drive is not ready drive enable active READY Drive is ready drive enable active Ou
158. es not occur in the specified amount of time 1 NOTE When the keypad is the primary control mechanism if this function is selected and communication is interrupted that is temporarily lost and then restored then the drive may not recognize the pressing of the Stop key even if the keypad is communicating with the drive 0 Range see table Default varies 7 22 Special Group This parameter group contains parameters that perform special functions such as the stor ing of parameter values Param STO RCL Address 0982 This parameter is of assistance in debugging abnormal drive behavior The following data codes may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Select No action is performed All parameters are resetto the factory defaults see chapter 11 on page KAG DEH 156 for default values Store Parm The customer s parameter values are stored in non volatile memory Load Param All parameters are set to the values stored in non volatile memory Range see table Default Select Application Address 0981 This parameter allows you to select special operating modes of the WF2 drive The follow ing data codes may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 130 Communication Group Parameters Display Function Normal Standard WF2 drive operation Makes the Sequencer applic
159. esired security may be enabled to limit a user s access to drive parameters Security is discussed in greater detail in section 6 5 starting on page 68 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 53 Set up and Getting Started 94 6 2 2 Description of the Keys on the Standard Keypad The following table describes the keys found on the keypad Key Function This key causes the drive to begin operating in the Forward direction unless key pad control is disabled by parameter Terminal Keypad see page 85 for more information This key causes the drive to begin operating in the Reverse direction unless key pad control is disabled by parameter Terminal Keypad see page 85 or param eter Reverse Mode is not set to Run FwdRev which enables the REV key see page 85 for more information The SHIFT key is used in a variety of ways When used in conjunction with the PROG key SHIFT initiates Level 2 pro gramming The display will then show the last parameter group accessed or the Security group if this is the first time Level 2 programming has been initi ated since the last power up When programming SHIFT returns one level and discards any changes that were made to parameter values For example when a list of parameters in a group is displayed SHIFT displays the list of parameter groups When the Operate display is shown SHIFT is used in conjunction with the ENTER key to show the Active
160. ess 0007 This parameter shows the version of the Motor Control Processing MCP program loaded in the WF2 drive Range 0 00 327 67 Default TSP Sw Version Read Only Address 0009 This parameter shows the version of the user interface software loaded in the drive Range 0 00 327 67 Default Appl Sw Version Read Only Address 0010 This parameter shows the version of the application software loaded in the WF2 drive Range 0 00 327 67 Default Drive Temp Trip Read Only Address 0015 When the temperature of the heatsink as found in parameter Drive Temp see page 79 exceeds the value set in parameter Drive Temp Lvl see page 119 a warning will be giv en If the temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter Drive Temp Trip an over temperature fault will occur and the drive will stop Range 0 125 C Default Drv Nom Current Read Only Address 0013 This parameter shows the nominal current of the WF2 drive Range 0 250 A Default Comm Option Read Only Address 0003 This parameter shows the type of communication option board attached to the WF2 drive The following values may be displayed for this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 7 N Parameters Drive Status Group Displayed Name Type of Communication Board None A communication board is not attached to the WF2 drive DeviceNet A DeviceNet Option Board is attached
161. et 3002 By F key 2 Disabled 149 By Ser Lnk 3 Spd Rf 1 0 Spd Rf 2 1 Spd Rf 3 2 Freq Config 1 3010 Spa ATERA 0 Spd Rf1 R3 4 Freq Config 2 3030 Spd R1 R2 R3 5 Freq Config 3 3050 Spd R2 R3 6 Freq Config 4 3070 E Freq Config 5 3090 US RTENE T Spd R1 R2 8 Spd Fixed 150 Freq Config 6 3110 SpdR2 R1 9 Freq Config 7 3130 Spd R1 R3 10 Freq Config 8 3150 E Spd R3 R1 11 Freq Config 9 3170 Freq Config 10 3190 Spa Re RG 13 SpdR3 R2 13 S R1 R2 R3 14 S R1 R3 R2 15 Spd Fixed 16 Table 32 174 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting Fixed Freq 1 3011 Fixed Freq 2 3031 Fixed Freq 3 3051 Fixed Freq 4 3071 Fixed Freq 5 3091 Fixed Freq 6 3111 0 00 320 00 Hz 0 Hz 151 Fixed Freq 7 3131 Fixed Freq 8 3151 Fixed Freq 9 3171 Fixed Freq 10 3191 Dir Control 1 3012 Dir Control 2 3032 Dir Control 3 3052 Dir Control 4 3072 Dir Control 5 3092 Son d Sio T Dir Control 6 3112 Reverse 2 Dir Control 7 3132 Dir Control 8 3152 Dir Control 9 3172 Dir Control 10 3192 Seq Time min 1 3013 Seq Time min 2 3033 Seq Time min 3 3053 Seq Time min 4 3073 Seq Time min 5 3093 Seq Time min 6 3113 0 65535 min 0 min 151 Seq Time min 7 3133 Seq Time min 8 3152 Seq Time min 9 3173 Seq Time min 10 3193 Seq Time se
162. et by parameter DC Inj Cur Lvl The length of time that the braking force is applied is determined by the time that the selected digital input is active The second type of DC injection braking supported by the WF2 drive is where DC braking occurs at a specified frequency With this type of braking as the drive slows down after a Stop command DC braking begins when the frequency reaches the value specified in DC Inj Freq If the frequency at the time of a Stop command is less than that of DC Inj Freq DC braking begins immediately The braking continues for the time period specified by parameter DC Inj Time Frq Once the time period elapses the drive may be re started NOTE If DC DC Inj Time Frq is set to zero braking is applied until the enable input DI EN is de activated To re start the enable input must be restored to its active condition and then the Run command re issued The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function None DC injection braking is not utilized At the frequency specified by parameter DC Inj Freq DC braking is in dd A i m DCI by DI DC braking occurs when the digital input configured for DC braking is y true or pulsed DCI DI Frq Either the specified frequency or a digital input initiates DC braking with digital input taking precedence Range see table Default None DC Inj Cur Lvl Address 0412 This parameter configures the amount o
163. et in parameter Boost Taper Frq see above 0 Range 0 00 100 0096 Default varies 7 14 Motor Setup Group This group contains parameters that allow you to configure aspects of the motor attached to the WF2 drive such as nominal motor current and voltage 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 103 Parameters 104 Motor Setup Group Nom Mtr Current Address 0520 This parameter configures the nominal motor current and is obtained from the nameplate on the attached motor NOTE The proper setting of these values greatly influence the proper operation of the drive when in the SVC operating mode as well as the accuracy of overload protection Range varies Default varies Nom Mir Voltage Address 0521 This parameter configures the voltage delivered to the motor terminals by the drive at the field weakening point NOTE The proper setting of these values greatly influence the proper operation of the drive when in the SVC operating mode as well as the accuracy of overload protection Range 100 690 V Default varies Nom Mtr Freq Address 0522 This parameter sets the nominal motor frequency as obtained from the motor s nameplate and also defines the frequency at the field weakening point NOTE The proper setting of these values greatly influence the proper operation of the drive when in the SVC operating mode as well as the accuracy of overload protection Range 25 00 320 00
164. ets the deceleration time during jogging operations Range 0 0 3200 0 Hz Default 1 0 Hz Ramp Ref Frq Address 0460 This parameter sets the frequency reference range during which the acceleration or decel eration time is active For example if this parameter is set to 30 Hz and the acceleration time is setto 10 s then the acceleration ramp will have the slope of a 30 Hz increase in 10 s TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 9 C Parameters Preset Speeds Group Note that it is accurate to the hundredths place 0 01 and that if set to 0 00 the reference frequency range is the difference between parameter Maximum Freq and parameter Min imum Freq For example if the minimum frequency was 20 Hz and the maximum was 60 Hz then the acceleration and deceleration times correspond to the lengths of time to accel erate or decelerate by 40 Hz 60 minus 20 Hz For most applications it is recommended that this parameter be left at its default value of 0 00 Hz 0 Range 0 00 320 00 Hz Default 0 00 Hz 7 10 Preset Speeds Group 96 This parameter group provides access to the parameters used to configure the preset ref erence speeds for the drive A preset speed is selected via a combination of digital inputs or by setting the bits of the control word appropriately see page 45 for more information Preset Speed 1 Address 0350 This parameter sets the first of seven preset speed The speed is selec
165. f DC current to be injected into the motor windings which acts as a braking force The amount of current is expressed as a percentage of nom inal motor current The braking force may be applied when starting or stopping TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Braking Options Group 9 9 9 9 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters For starting see parameter DC Puls Start on page 105 For stopping see parameter DC Inj Config on page 108 Range 0 0 150 0 Default 50 096 DC Inj Time Stp Address 0413 If parameter Stop Mode is set to DCI to Sip see page 84 direct current will be applied to the motor This parameter DC Inj Time Stp determines how long the direct current will be applied which varies with the speed of the motor The relationship between the speed of the motor and the length of time that direct current is applied is linear until the output fre quency is 10 or less of the maximum frequency At that point the length of time that direct current is applied to the motor is always 20 of the setting of DC Inj Time Stp For example if DC Inj Time Stp is set to 20 s and the drive is running at maximum frequen Cy direct current will be applied for the entire 20 s when a Stop command occurs If the drive was only running at half the maximum frequency direct current would be applied for only one half of the time specified by DC Inj Time Stp in this example 10 s Finally if the drive was ru
166. ference signal Fault ence signal 37 Loss Freq Ref The drive detected the loss of the refer Restore the reference signal Warning ence signal 38 Broken Wire Trip The drive detected a broken wire to Ana Check the control wiring for a broken wire Fault log Input 1 and replace 39 Broken Wire Trip The drive detected a broken wire to Ana Check the control wiring for a broken wire Warning log Input 1 and replace 40 Loss of Keypad Communication with the keypad is lost Investigate and correct communication while keypad control is active problem 41 Ext Fit Warning The configured input sensed an external Investigate why the external fault occurred Warning fault and correct 42 SerLnk TimeOut The programmed value of parameter Reset and restore serial link communica Fault Comm Timeout see page 132 was ex tions ceeded 43 IDI Logic Not Set DI active logic is not set Set DI active logic via Active Logic param eter see page 110 44 IDI Logic Changed Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 45 DBRes Over Temp The internal dynamic brake DB resistor Reduce the amount of time that the DB Fault is too hot due to a peak overload is applied Reduce how often the dynamic brake is used lt Check that parameters DB Res Value DB Rth Value and DB Cth Value see page 107 are correctly set Reduce the load Consult BERGES 46 DB Res Over Temp The internal DB resistor is too hot due to a Reduce the amount of time tha
167. figure D4 Configure and D5 Configure PID functionality is disabled so all parameters in the PID Configure group are not avail able The parameters that support configuration of the Analog Input Output Option Board WF2AIO 01 are not available DeviceNet communication is not permitted 10 2 2 Parameters With Changed Functionality Due to the added requirements of the application the following modifications are made when the Sequencer application is loaded Parameters Accel Time 3 and Decel Time 3 are combined into one parameter called Acc Dec Time 3 The default value of this new parameter is 10 s if a non default value was set for either of the old parameters that value is discarded Parameters Jog Accel Time and Jog Decel Time are combined into one parameter called Jog Acc Dec Time The default value of this new parameter is 1 s if a non de fault value was set for either of the old parameters that value is discarded The ability to switch between terminal strip and keypad control modes via Bit 11 of pa rameter Cntl Word 1 is disabled Bit 0 of parameter Cntl Word 2 ceases to enable PID control and instead is used to turn the Sequencer application on or off In addition Bits 13 and 14 are ignored because De viceNet communication is not permitted The assignable values for parameters D6 Configure through D10 Configure as well as Enter Key are modified to include Stp Change Seq Reset Seq Pause and Seq Enable The par
168. formation on this mode E B E This key performs two functions When pressed by itself it acts as the F4 function key the function of which is defined by parameter F4 Key Config see page 129 When SHIFT is pressed at the same time as this key the keypad enters Direct Parameter Access Mode see page 65 for more infor mation on this mode When the keypad is in the Direct Parameter Access Mode the numeric keypad allows you to set the value of a parameter by keying in the val ue rather than by scrolling to the desired value The function of this key the up arrow key is dependent on the mode of the keypad n modes other than programming the up arrow key moves the ar rowhead from one menu selection to the next selection When programming the value of a parameter it increases the value of the parameter If the key is held down the rate of scrolling will in crease The rate of scrolling will increase still further if the SHIFT key is pressed along with the up arrow key E The function of this key the down arrow key is dependent on the mode of the keypad n modes other than programming the down arrow key moves the arrowhead from one menu selection to the previous selection When programming the value of a parameter it decreases the val ue of the parameter If the key is held down the rate of scrolling will increase The rate of scrolling will increase still further if the SHIFT key is pres
169. g at the last speed reference received TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 73 Parameters 7 Parameters 74 7 1 Introduction The WF2 drive incorporates a large number of parameters that allow you to configure the drive to meet the special requirements of your particular application The parameters are organized into groups of related functionality and within the groups the parameters are identified by a short descriptive name As described in the previous chapter the parameters may be broadly grouped into two types those assigned a value such as the minimum frequency and those assigned a func tion such as the type of stop to be performed either ramp or coast The manner in which these two types are displayed is slightly different as shown in figure 24 on page 57 for the standard keypad and figure 29 on page 65 for the enhanced keypad This chapter describes the available parameters the groups in which they are located and the values or functions that may be assigned to them Chapter 11 starting on page 156 provides a summary of all parameters including their ranges and default values This chap ter also notes the memory address of each parameter which is useful for serial communi cation 7 2 Parameter Groups The WF2 drive provides 23 parameter groups all of which are accessible with either the standard or enhanced keypad provided security conditions are met Note however tha
170. ge Voltage kW HP kW HP 380 V 460 V 380 V 460 V 380 V 460 V 380 V 460 V AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC 4000 7x 0 75 1 0 1 1 1 5 3 0 2 4 3 2 3 2 2 4 2 1 2 8 2 8 4001 5x 1 5 2 0 1 5 2 0 5 2 3 9 5 2 3 9 3 8 3 4 3 8 3 4 4002 2x 2 2 3 0 3 0 5 0 7 2 5 6 7 7 7 7 5 7 4 8 6 6 6 6 4003 7x 4 0 5 0 5 0 7 5 12 0 8 8 12 8 12 8 8 9 7 6 11 0 11 0 4005 5x 5 5 7 5 6 7 10 0 15 0 12 8 16 3 16 3 12 0 11 0 14 0 14 0 4007 5x 7 5 10 0 7 5 10 0 19 7 16 3 19 7 16 3 15 6 14 0 15 6 14 0 4011 0x 11 0 15 0 13 0 20 0 3 phase 30 9 25 8 33 3 33 3 23 0 21 0 27 0 27 0 380 460 V AC 0 460 V AC 4015 0x 15 0 20 0 15 0 20 0 15 40 0 33 3 40 0 33 3 31 0 27 0 31 0 27 0 4018 5x 18 5 25 0 20 5 30 0 46 3 40 0 47 8 47 8 37 0 34 0 40 0 40 0 4022 0x 22 0 30 0 25 5 40 0 57 5 47 8 62 4 62 4 43 0 40 0 52 0 52 0 4030 0x 30 0 40 0 33 9 50 0 62 8 53 3 65 0 65 0 61 0 52 0 65 0 65 0 4037 0x 37 0 50 0 40 3 60 0 71 0 65 0 77 0 77 0 71 0 65 0 77 0 77 0 4045 0x 45 0 60 0 50 3 75 0 86 0 77 0 96 0 96 0 86 0 77 0 96 0 96 0 4055 0x 55 0 75 0 55 0 82 0 105 0 96 0 105 0 105 0 105 0 96 0 105 0 105 0 Table 2 460 V AC Models Motor Power Maximum Input Current A Output Current A Model Constant Variable Input Constant Variable Output Constant Variable Number WF2K Torque Torque Voltage Torque Torque Voltage Torque Torque kW HP kW HP 575 V AC 575 V AC 575 V AC 575 V AC 5000 7x 0 75 1 0 1 1 1 5 2 0 3 1 1 7 2 3 5001 5x 15 2 0 1 5 2 0 3 6 3 6 2 7 2 7 5002 2x 2 2 3
171. ges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Installation 4 5 3 EMC Ordinance EMC Directive 89 336 EEC The frequency inverters were tested in the form of a practical test set up in a switchgear cabinet in accordance with our interference suppression measures in these operating in structions EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility The limit values of the standards below were fulfilled under these conditions EMA Electromagnetic Emission EN 50081 1 Basic specification Emitted interference Limit value class A or EN 50081 2 Basic specification Emitted interference Limit value class B optional EN 55011 Emitted interference EMB Electromagnetic Interference EN 50082 2 Basic specification Interference immunity EN 50140 Electromagnetic fields EN 60801 Static discharge ESD IEC 801 4 Burst on line lead data line NOTE At least the following conditions must be fulfilled for compliance with the limit values of the aforementioned standards Preceding the unit by a line filter option or a line filter and a output choke line filter 1 and output choke not included in the scope of delivery Laying the motor cable in a shielded configuration Laying the control cable in a shielded configuration Observe general RFI suppression measures refer to the chapter 4 5 EMC Electro magnetic Compatibility As the aforementioned interference immunity tests are based on st
172. gure 34 on page 181 provides a flowchart of PID control and shows the interaction of these parameters 13 2 Configuration of PID Control Parameters 13 2 1 180 This section discusses the parameters used for PI control and provides advice on how best to configure these parameters for your particular application Parameter PID Configure Parameter PID Configure determines whether feed forward is enabled and whether the loop is operated via digital inputs The following paragraphs discuss these characteristics in more detail Feed forward Feed forward is usually enabled when there is very little difference between the process speed and the feedback signal For example feed forward is useful in speed regulation situations such as controlling mo tor speed in a closed loop Note that feed forward should be enabled when attempting to close a speed loop Feed forward is not suited to applications such as pressure regulation systems because generally the process speed and the process variable are vastly different TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Fundamentals of PID Control ule gt NIY 8yuo2 eja yoeqp 4 ZLS 969 00014 gt 8 NIV JOH yoeqpeej e PAS 8yuo2 zjes 118 J9M x KE 94 9 ss900lq 9 V NIV gt Cc NI
173. he frequency ref erence and start stop commands or different paths may be used for each The WF2 drive provides three control paths the keypad either standard or enhanced the terminal strip and the serial link The table below further elaborates these control paths TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 69 Set up and Getting Started 70 Control Path Frequency Reference Start Stop Commands When in the Operate mode the up When in the Operate mode the Keypad and down keys are used to set the FWD REV and STOP keys control frequency the drive A combination of analog and digital A combination of analog and digital terminal Sip inputs sets the frequency control the drive Commands arriving via remote com Commands arriving via remote com a munications set the frequency munications control the drive Table 26 WF2 Control Paths You may determine which control paths are currently active by reading two parameters These read only parameters are Freq Ref Ctrl and Start Stop Ctrl see page 80 for more information on these parameters 6 6 2 Selection of Control Paths The WF2 drive provides two methods for selecting the control path for the frequency refer ence and start stop commands Method 1 Selection via Parameters Terminal Keypad and Cntl Word 1 The first method is to set the Terminal Keypad parameter to a value that corresponds to the desired contr
174. he results The results will likely show that the value of parameters PID Int Gain and PID Deriv Gain if necessary need to be modified to complete the implementation Minor adjustment of the other PID control param eters may also be necessary Once the process control loop is optimally functioning if you changed the value of param eter PID Configure for tuning restore it to its original value Also it is strongly recommend ed that the custom settings for the parameters be saved by using parameter Param Param STO RCL see page 130 for more information If you need further assistance or advice please contact BERGES TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB BERGES BERGES electronic GmbH Industriestra e 13 D 51709 Marienheide Rodt Postfach 1140 e D 51703 Marienheide Tel 0 22 64 17 0 Fax 0 22 64 1 71 26 http www berges de e mail Info BEL Oberges de
175. hing not enabled LOC Local Mode REM Remote Mode SLC Serial link is in complete control SLP Serial link is in partial control TRM Terminal strip if Local Remote switching not enabled TSK Reference frequency set via terminal strip drive control via keypad Status of the Drive Listed in order from highest to lowest priority if more than one status is active the higher priority status is displayed FAULTED Drive is faulted AUTO RESET Drive is faulted but an automatic re start is pending NO DRV EN No drive enable NOT READY Drive is not ready drive enable active READY Drive is ready drive enable active OVERVOLTAGE Input voltage is too high LOW VOLTAGE Input voltage is too low CURRENT LIM Drive is in Current Limit TORQUE LIM Drive is in Torque Limit HI CURRENT High current warning HI TEMP High temperature warning JOG Jog operation is active ZERO SPEED Run command active but no reference ACCELERATE Drive is accelerating DECELERATE Drive is decelerating FORWARD Drive is at speed in Forward direction REVERSE Drive is at speed in Reverse direction DC INJECT DC injection braking is active KPAD STOP Drive stopped from the keypad LS LOCKOUT Line start lockout FLY CATCH Catch on the fly start in progress MAINS LOSS Power is not being applied to mains input that is it s feeding via the DC bus Figu
176. his warning may result in injury or equipment damage 0 Range 0 1000 Default 0 Feedback Gain Address 0656 This parameter provides a scaling factor for the feedback signal The range is O to 2000 corresponding to 0 0 to 200 0 of the maximum frequency o Range 0 2000 Default 0 PID High Limit Address 0657 This parameter sets the high limit of PID output The range is 0 00 to 100 00 of the max imum frequency o Range 0 00 100 00 Default 100 00 PID Low Limit Address 0658 This parameter sets the low limit of PID output The range is 0 00 to 100 00 of the maxi mum frequency 0 Range 0 00 100 00 Default 0 00 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 137 Parameters 138 PID Configure Group PID High Alarm Address 0659 When the PID output exceeds the value of this parameter which is a percentage of the ref erence frequency a digital output or relay may be configured to provide notification Range 0 00 100 0096 Default 100 0096 PID Low Alarm Address 0660 When the PID output falls below the value of this parameter which is a percentage of the reference frequency a digital output or relay may be configured to provide notification Range 0 00 100 00 Default 0 00 PID Reference Read Only Address 0670 This parameter shows the setpoint for the PID control loop The setpoint is expressed as a percentage of the maximum frequency The value shown in this parameter ca
177. ights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 26 07 11 03 08 GB Connections lt Wire voltage rating must be a minimum of 300 V for 230 V AC systems and 600 V Class 1 wire for 460 V AC and 575 V AC systems Usecircuit breakers on the incoming power lines lt Grounding must be in accordance with VDE NEC and CEC If multiple WF2 drives are installed near each other each must be connected to ground Take care to not form a ground loop lt Wire must be made of copper and rated 60 75 C unless otherwise specified in the table below Refer to tables 8 9 and 10 on pages 28 and 29 for recommended wire gauges and temperature ratings When selecting the distance from the WF2 drive to the motor the following considerations should be kept in mind The distance from the WF2 drive to the motor should not exceed 300 meters lt If the leads for motor connections exceed 30 meters the motor windings may be sub jected to voltage stresses two to three times nominal values unless an output filter is uti lized Consult with the motor manufacturer to ensure compatibility Output filters should be used to limit voltage problems experienced by the motor when the distance from the WF2 drive to the motor exceeds 300 meters and or when the mo tor connections exceed 30 meters Consult with BERGES for recommendations in this case 5 2 3 Line Power Connection 5 2 4 Use The frequency inverters are designed for installation in
178. ink PID Enable Enables PID control Fit Reset Resets a fault Ext Fault Monitor for an external fault Note that you must ae configure param eter External Fault to generate a warning or fault see page 122 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 111 08_GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters 112 Display Function Activates the 8 bit Digital Input Reference Mode D3 functions as the least significant bit of the eight bits in the word with inputs D4 through D10 the most significant bit being assigned to the remaining bits If a EE digital input is not configured that input is considered inactive 0 See parameter Main Speed Ref on page 89 for information on how the bi nary word is translated into a decimal value for the output frequency Range see table Default Jog D4 Configure Address 0706 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D4 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to param eter D3 Configure provided that the Sequencer application is not turned on If the Sequencer application is turned on D4 is set to Seq Run and cannot be changed Range see D3 Configure Default Reverse D5 Configure Address 0707 This parameter configures what function is performed by the D5 terminal The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the same as those that may be assigned to param eter D3 Configure
179. ion In this example in both 2 and 3 wire control if the drive is already running pressing the jog pushbutton will have no effect When the drive is stopped and the input to D4 is activat ed by pressing the pushbutton the drive will ramp to the jogging reference speed set by parameter Jog Ref Config see page 90 in the time set by parameter Jog Accel Time When the input is deactivated the drive speed goes to zero in the time set by parameter Jog Decel Time Note that these examples showed 2 and 3 wire control systems running in one direction Jogging may also be incorporated into control systems that run in two directions For these applications two digital inputs are required one for Forward Jog and one for Reverse Jog with the particular type of jogging selected by parameter configuration Run Jog DI or Push button Jog controlling the jog operations Figure 12 on page 45 shows examples of For ward and Reverse jogging operations TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Connections TB4 CM CM EN EN D10 Jog D10 dag D9 Reverse D9 Reverse D8 dog D8 o 6 D7 Forward D7 dion D da 3 D6 Forward 3 D5 o 6 3 D5 3 a Reverse E B avs E D3 um T D3 E co O c D2 Forward g D2 1 D1 saa wg D1 ara E 24 24 24 6 6 24 N 24 or NC 424 or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figur
180. iption of the Standard Keypad oococcoccococcc es 53 6 2 1 OM RT a a eae aang Site ak foe eda al TE 53 6 2 2 Description of the Keys on the Standard Keypad 0c cence eee eee 54 6 2 3 Modes and Displays of the Standard Keypad 0 00 cece eee eee 55 6 2 4 Description of the LEDs on the Standard Keypad 2000 cece eee ences 58 6 2 5 Upgrading Firmware by Reflashing llis 59 6 3 QUICK Salio rore Mae ea Ta Ae ok eee ae il hee D e ee ad a Bes 59 6 4 Description of the Enhanced Keypad a cece tte 60 6 4 1 INTOCUCUON eet nentes Grace ate yee hd saat Se dir ee See Pass Seis 60 6 4 2 Keys on the Enhanced Keypad ooocococccco aaa eaaa aaa aaa 60 6 4 3 Modes and Displays of the Enhanced Keypad 00 eee eee 62 6 4 4 LEDs on the Enhanced Keypad 2 0 0 e eee teens 68 6 5 S GU aaa it ede dost tea ei ew ede Peek dol le tana 68 6 5 1 Access bevelsS cuoio yeh dey tee E A RE d Ear Weds ena akon 68 6 5 2 Gaining Access when Security Enabled liliis 68 6 5 3 Disabling Security liiis hn 69 6 6 Gontrol Paths rh e Lk qui a waded ciue Gea oer ES Geese Laudes 69 6 6 1 Overview of Control Paths o ooccococcc en 69 6 6 2 Selection of Control Paths ooccococccoco hn 70 6 7 Serial Link Communication ss ag a aa aa ak a a a tee rre 72 6 7 1 Configuration of the Serial Link a aaa eh 73 6 7 2 Parameter AddressesS ooocoococcooc eel 73
181. is not permitted when the Sequencer ap plication is invoked 0 1 sap ToTv To T3 7 T5 T5 T3 T3 T2 3 T9 Bit When Set to 1 Signifies Bit When Set to 1 Signifies 8 Activate digital output DQ1 O Enable PID control or Sequencer app 9 Activate digital output DQ2 1 Pause Sequencer application 10 Activate digital output DQ3 2 Reset Sequencer application 11 Activate relay RA 3 not used 12 Activate relay RB 4 not used 13 NetNetwork Timeout Fault 5 not used 14 NetNetwork Timeout Warning 6 Activate relay R1 15 NetNetwork Forced Fault 7 Activate relay R2 Range 0 65535 Default O Ext Freq Ref 1 Address 0203 This parameter sets the frequency for the first external frequency reference FEXT1 Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 00 Hz Ext Freq Ref 2 Address 0205 This parameter sets the frequency for the second external frequency reference FEXT2 Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 0 00 Hz Status Word 1 Read Only Address 0050 The bits of the word represented by this parameter provide the following information note that if parameter Application is set to Sequencer to invoke the Sequencer application Bit 10 will be set to zero and cannot be changed because Remote mode is disabled TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB PID Configure Group Parameters 0 1 15 14 13 12 1 510 9 8 7 6 5 2 3 2 10
182. l and Reference Commands sent via serial communication initiate control functions and Serial Lnk Set the reference speed Note that if this value is selected the Local Config parameter is set to Nm non ser Range see table Default TS C amp R Catch on Fly Address 0620 This parameter sets whether the catch on the fly feature is enabled When it is enabled a Run command will cause the drive to match its output to the speed of a freewheeling load and then begin running When the feature is disabled a Run command causes the drive to start from zero speed The following functions may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 87 Parameters Speed Reference Group Display Function Disabled The drive will not perform a catch on the fly Enabled The drive will perform a catch on the fly 0 Range see table Default Disabled Stop Key Address 0950 This parameter sets the type of stop that occurs when the drive is running under terminal strip control and the STOP key on the keypad is pressed The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled The STOP key is disabled Rmp to Stp A ramp to stop is performed Cst to Stp A coast to stop is performed 0 Range see table Range see table Default Cst to Stp Enter Key Address 0978 This paramete
183. l cables If signal cables have to cross a power cable they should cross at an angle of 90 Control wires longer than 3 feet 1 meter must be run in shielded cable and the shield must be terminated at common CM on the drive Note that connection to CM the circuit com mon rather than earth ground is allowed because WF2 drives have isolated control inputs If the signal run exceeds 30 feet 9 meters a 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA signal should be used as it will have better noise immunity than a low level voltage Other loads connected to the line can cause voltage spikes which can impair the function of the inverter and can even damage it Chokes or line filters option can be additionally used on the line side to protect the inverter against voltage spikes resulting from the switch ing of large loads on the line These chokes and filters are available as accessories If the drive is operated from switchgear devices or is in close proximity to switchgear devic es as in a common cabinet the following procedures are recommended as a precaution to prevent these devices from interfering with the drive s operation Wire the coils of contactors switchgear devices and relay combinations with RC ele ments or with free wheel diodes Use shielded cables for external control and measuring cables Lay disturbing cables e g power and contactor control circuits separately and at a dis tance from the control cables TB Wood s and Ber
184. l communication interface may be monitored by a watchdog function The WF2 drive s watchdog function is enabled by setting the value of parameter Net Timeout FIt to either Warning or Fault see page 125 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Communication Group 0 07 11 03 Parameters When the watchdog function is set to Fault and the drive is configured for serial link control of either direction or speed the drive must sense a valid telegram within the duration set by Net Timeout Fit If a valid telegram is not sensed within the configured time period the drive will generate Fault 42 Ser Lnk Timeout and coast to a stop If the watchdog function is set to Warning instead of Fault the drive must still sense a valid telegram within the duration set by Net Timeout FIt However if a valid telegram is not re ceived in the configured time period then the drive will generate Fault Code 58 Ser Lnk TimeOut Warning and keep running Range 1 60 s Default 5 s EKP Baudrate Address 0906 This parameter sets baud rate for communication with the enhanced keypad and may be set to either 9600 or 19200 bps Range 9600 or 19 2K Default 19 2K EKP Timeout Address 0907 This parameter configures a watchdog timer for communication with an enhanced keypad If the enhanced keypad does not respond in the configured amount of time and parameter Keypad Control is set to EKP Loss or SKP or EKP see page 1
185. l input terminals for both types of control The default mode is 2 wire control In this mode digital input D1 is configured as the Run input and is not programmable although additional Run inputs may be configured by using other digital inputs An input on D1 will start the drive provided the Enable circuit is closed The Enable circuit is the connection between terminals EN and 24V which may be either the factory installed jumper or a normally closed disconnect switch supplied by the custom er Also note that line start lockout is enabled by default With this feature the drive will not start if a Run command is active when power is applied To disable line start lockout con figure parameter Start Mode to Auto Start see page 84 for more information TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Connections TB4 TB4 CM CM EN EN D10 D10 D9 D9 e D8 D8 D7 3 D7 6 3 D6 D6 5 D5 3 D5 D4 O E D4 O E D3 O T D3 T D2 Run 9 D2 9 bi o E D1 24 24 Q 24 24 5 24 or NC 424 Q or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 8 2 and 3 Wire Control Active High Logic Setting parameter 2 Wire 3 Wire see page 83 to 3 wire selects 3 wire control In this type of control the drive is started based on the rising edge of a pulse on the Start digital input
186. ld be observed f your application does not require enabling by digital input for the duration of tuning you should select a value for parameter PID Configure which does allow a digital input to enable PID control Once tuning is finished you can restore the parameter to its orig inal value Install a switch to select closed loop and open loop performance lt Connect a calibration signal to the drive to simulate the effects of the transducer s signal While this is not absolutely required it can be very helpful Once the preparations for tuning are complete enable PID control via the digital input and set the switch to open loop Then operate the drive utilizing any necessary instrumentation for example pressure gauges meters etc to characterize the range of the signal sup plied from the transducer for example at 3 PSI the transducer provides 1 V This will aid in better understanding the operation of the system and make calibration easier Select a mid range operating point for the system and inject a signal close to that which the transducer would provide at that point With closed loop selected vary the signal by the val ue determined by the set up technician and determine whether the proportional response of the system is appropriate If the questions posed in the previous section are answered correctly and your initial assumptions prove correct a combination of input scaling and pro portional gain should make the pe
187. le 0611 0 0 100 0 100 0 104 Mtr Ovid Time 0612 0 0 300 0 s 60 0 s 104 Motor RS 0525 Measured by drive 105 DC Puls Start Li A in DC at Strt 105 DC Pulse Time 0541 0 00 25 00 s 1 00 s 105 SVC Lo Spd Comp 0542 0 1280 256 105 No Thermal Prot 0 Motor Type 0610 Std Induction 1 No Thermal Prot 105 Blower Cooled 2 Supply Voltage 0549 See page 106 Varies by model 106 Braking Options Group Disabled 0 DB Config 0630 OS m Int DB Res 106 Ext DB Res 3 DB Res Value 0632 0 3276 6 Q Varies 107 DB Rth Value 0633 0 16383 Varies 107 DB Cth Value 0634 0 65535 Varies 107 Table 32 166 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Summary of WF2 Parameters NOTES 1 Not available for D2 Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting None 0 DCI on Frq 1 DC Inj Config 0411 DCI by DI 2 None 108 DCI DI Frq 3 DC Inj Cur Lvl 0412 0 0 150 0 50 0 108 DC Inj Time Stp 0413 0 00 60 00 s 0 20 s 109 DC Inj Freq 0414 0 00 25 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 109 DC Inj Time Frq 0416 0 00 60 00 s 0 20 s 109 Digital Inputs Group f Active Low 0 4 Active Logic 0700 Active Hgh 1 Active Hgh 110 D2 Configure 0704 Not Assign 0 Stop 110 D3 Configure 0705 dus 1 Jog 111 D4 Configure 0706 ons Reverse 112 D5 Configure 0707 Reverse 4 Jog Revers 112 D6 Configure
188. le 29 144 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB WF Options 9 WF2 Options 9 1 Remote Keypad Kits The enhanced keypad is available for remote mounting or hand held use in your applica tion It is available in either a white part number EKPW 01 or gray configuration part number EKPG 01 It affords all the flexibility described in section 6 of this manual 9 2 P31 IP21 Conversion Kits The IP31 model may optionally be fitted with a kit for terminating shielded cable Four kits are available depending on the size of the model the part numbers for the kits are W2CP01 W2CP02 W2CP03 and W2CP04 These kits contain four clamps that slide into slots on the included cable plate The clamps are used to terminate shielded cable The cable plate easily replaces the conduit plate on the bottom of the IP31 model 9 3 SIOCO 2 Serial Port Converter This product allows the standard RS 232 serial port of a computer to be interfaced with the drive s industrially rated RS 485 communication port 9 4 Reflash Tool The Reflash Tool allows you to upgrade the firmware of the WF2 Sensorless Vector Drive This allows the latest features to be implemented in existing hardware For more informa tion on this capability refer to Form 1322 Reflash Procedures for the E trAC WF2 Series Sensorless Vector Drive 9 5 Dynamic Braking Units To augment the braking capacity of the WF2 drive TB Wood s makes three dy
189. ll power Place a DO NOT TURN ON label on the drive disconnect Lockthe disconnect in the open position Failure to observe these precautions will cause shock or burn resulting in severe personal injury or death 5 1 Introduction This chapter provides information on connecting power and control wiring to the WF2 drive 5 2 General Wiring Information 5 2 4 Wiring Practices When making power and control connections observe these precautions Never connect input AC power to the motor output terminals T1 U T2 V or T3 W or damage to the drive will result Power wiring to the motor must have the maximum possible separation from all other power wiring Do not run in the same conduit this separation reduces the possibility of coupling electrical noise between circuits Cross conduits at right angles whenever power and control wiring cross Good wiring practice also requires separation of control circuit wiring from all power wir ing Since power delivered from the drive contains high frequencies which may cause interference with other equipment do not run control wires in the same conduit or race way with power or motor wiring 5 2 2 Considerations for Power Wiring and Motor Lead Length Power wiring refers to the line and load connections made to terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T and T1 U T2 V T3 W respectively Select power wiring as follows Useonly UL CUL and VDE recognized wire TB Wood s and Berges All R
190. me 3 Decel Time 3 and Main Ramp Type Acc Dec Time 4 Address 0318 This parameter sets the length of time to accelerate from O Hz to the maximum frequency as well as to decelerate from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz for Alternate Ramp 3 AR3 Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 1 0 s Acc Dec Time 5 Address 0320 This parameter sets the length of time to accelerate from O Hz to the maximum frequency as well as to decelerate from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz for Alternate Ramp 4 AR4 Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 1 0 s 10 3 8 Seq Configure Group 148 A new parameter group becomes available to allow you to configure the steps of the Se quencer application This is the Seq Configure group and is placed at the end of the list of parameter groups after the Communications group Seq Enable Address 3000 This parameter determines the means by which the Sequencer application is turned on The following may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled Disabled Always Permanently turned on TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Seq Configure Group 07 11 03 08_GB Sequencer Application Display Function By DI Turned on or off by digital input D3 which is hard coded for this func y tion a different digital input cannot be used instead of D3 Turned on or off by a function key on the enhanced keypad The pa
191. me locked again You must re enter the password to config ure the settings of the accessible parameters 6 5 3 Disabling Security Standard Keypad To disable security perform the following steps 1 Unlock all available parameters This is accomplished by pressing SHIFT PROG to initiate Level 2 programming and then navigating to the Enter Password parameter Once the parameter is displayed use the up or down arrow keys to set the displayed value to the value of the password and then press the Enter key If the correct password is entered all parameters at the configured security level will be available 2 Navigate to the Set Password parameter which is also in the Security Group Set the displayed value of this parameter to zero and then press the Enter key 3 Navigate to the Enter Password parameter which is also in the Security Group Set the displayed value of this parameter to zero and then press the Enter key 4 Security is now disabled All parameters not just those of the configured security level will be available for programming Enhanced Keypad To disable security with the enhanced keypad navigate to the Set Password parameter in the Security group and set the value of this parameter to 0 6 6 Control Paths 07 11 03 08 GB Overview of Control Paths Control paths are the means for sending the frequency speed reference and start stop commands to the WF2 drive The control path may be the same for both t
192. me to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency parameter Maximum Freq for the primary ramp Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 3 0 s Decel Time 1 Address 0311 This parameter sets the length of time to decelerate from the maximum frequency param eter Maximum Freq to 0 Hz for the primary ramp Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 3 0 s Accel Time 2 Address 0312 This parameter sets the length of time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency parameter Maximum Freq for Alternate Ramp 1 Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 1 0 s Decel Time 2 Address 0313 This parameter sets the length of time to decelerate from the maximum frequency param eter Maximum Freq to 0 Hz for Alternate Ramp 1 Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 1 0 s Accel Time 3 Address 0314 This parameter sets the length of time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency parameter Maximum Freq for Alternate Ramp 2 Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 10 0 s Decel Time 3 Address 0315 This parameter sets the length of time to decelerate from the maximum frequency param eter Maximum Freq to 0 Hz for Alternate Ramp 2 Range 0 1 3200 0 s Default 10 0 s TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters EMOP Ramp Time Address 0316 This parameter sets the length of time for acceleration 0 Hz to the EMOP reference speed and deceleration EMOP reference speed to 0 Hz when EMOP is active
193. mum frequency The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Normal Not inverted minimum input is minimum freq Inverted Inverted minimum input is maximum freq Range see table Default Normal AINA Offset Address 0261 AINB Offset Address 0266 AINC Offset Address 0271 These parameters are used to alter the starting value of the input being sent to the A B or C analog input terminal of the Analog Input Output Option Board For example with a O to 10 V DC input setting this parameter to a value of 10 alters the range to 1 to 10 V DC NOTE The minimum difference between offset and span will be limited to 10 If offset is set to a value greater than span zero speed output will result Range 0 0 100 0 Default 0 096 AINA Span Address 0262 AINB Span Address 0267 AINC Span Address 0272 These parameters are used to alter the range of the input being sentto the A B or C analog input terminal of the Analog Input Output Option Board For example with a 0 to 10 V DC input setting this parameter to a value of 50 alters the range to 0 to 5 V DC NOTE The minimum difference between offset and span will be limited to 10 If offset is Set to a value greater than span zero speed output will result Range 0 0 200 096 Default 100 096 AINA Filter Time Address 0263 AINB Filter Time Address 0268 AINC Filter Time Address 0273 These parameters set the filt
194. n Remote mode TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 71 Set up and Getting Started 72 The Operate display will show either LOC Local or REM Remote to denote what mode is currently active Once the drive is placed in Local or Remote mode the settings of parameters Local Config and Remote Config respectively determine how the control path is selected As described on page 86 the following functions may be assigned to the Local Config pa rameter to specify the control path Kypd C amp R The keypad is the control path for both the reference frequency and start stop commands Ser C amp R The serial link is the control path for both the reference frequency and start stop commands Nm R Ser C The control path for the reference frequency is as defined by parameter Terminal Keypad while the serial link is the control path for start stop commands Nm non Ser When Local mode is active the control path for both reference frequency and start stop commands is set by the Terminal Keypad parameter al though control via the serial link may be asserted if desired when Remote mode is active the serial link is used to select the control path and cannot be overridden using the SLO bit of Cntl Word 1 Note that this setting forc es the Remote Config parameter to Serial Lnk Similarly as described on page 87 the following functions may be assigned to the Remote Config parameter to specify the con
195. n be used to determine whether the control path of the drive is configured correctly as well as whether the analog input is configured correctly with respect to span and offset Range 0 100 Default PID Feedback Address 0671 This parameter establishes the setpoint for the feedback signal as a percentage of the max imum frequency This parameter may be used to provide analog input scaling of the feed back signal It can also be sent to either the AQ1 or AQ2 analog output terminal if the analog output is configured to show the PID feedback signal see page 120 for more information Range 0 100 Default 0 PID Error Read Only Address 0672 This parameter shows the value of the error between PID feedback and PID reference The error is expressed as a percentage of the maximum frequency Range 0 100 Default PID Output Read Only Address 0673 This parameter shows the sum of P Part Part and D Part components The sum is limited by parameters PID High Limit and PID Low Limit Range 0 100 Default PID P Part Read Only Address 0674 This parameter shows the amount of the proportional contribution to the total output ex pressed as a percentage of the maximum frequency Range 0 100 Default TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Ungrouped Parameters 0 Parameters PID I Part Read Only Address 0675 This parameter shows the amount of the integ
196. n is used to set Bit 10 of parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 133 to 0 or 1 with O selecting Local mode and 1 selecting Remote mode 0 Range see table Default None Local Config Address 0408 This parameter sets the source for reference speed and control functions when Local mode is active see the Local Remote parameter on the previous page for more information The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Keypd C amp R Function Keypad Control and Reference The keypad is the source for both the reference speed by the up and down keys and control functions by the FWD REV if enabled and STOP keys Ser C amp R Serial Link Control and Reference Commands sent via serial communication initiate control functions and set the reference speed Since the serial link is explicitly configured as the control path the SLO serial link override function is not available Ser C Nm R Serial Link Control and Keypad Reference The up and down arrow keys on the keypad set the reference speed while the control functions are commanded from the serial link TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Control Modes Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Display Function Keypad or Serial Link Control and Reference The keypad is the source for control functions and the reference speed However by setti
197. namic brak ing units that may be added to the drive Model WDB211 dynamic braking unit for 230 V AC models Model WDB411 dynamic braking unit for 460 V AC models and Model WDB510 dynamic braking unit for 575 V AC models See page 34 for more information on adding a dynamic braking unit to a WF2 drive 9 6 DeviceNet Option Board The DeviceNet Option Board part number WF2DNO1 provides an RS485 interface to a DeviceNet network It supports baud rates up to 500K Contact BERGES for further infor mation 9 7 Analog Input Output Option Board The Analog Input Output Option Board part number WF2AIO 01 provides up to three ad ditional analog input channels two additional analog output channels and two additional relays for the WF2 inverter Contact BERGES for further information 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 145 Sequencer Application 10 Sequencer Application 10 1 Introduction The WF2 drive provides a powerful feature for performing sequences of operations the Se quencer application The Sequencer application provides ten fully configurable steps that comprise the program for the sequencer This application is made available loaded by setting parameter Application to the value Sequencer see page 130 for more information This allows the Seq Configure parameter group to be capable of being displayed and also re configures other parameters to support the Sequenc
198. nd the people who come into contact with them are no longer protected in such a situation Consequent ly please note the following FI safety switches are only to be installed between the supplying network and the inverter Frequency inverters must not be connected through a fault current safety switch as the sole protective measure TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 27 Connections The following exception permits the connection of a frequency inverter via a fault current safety switch as a single protective measure Installing the latest model of an Fl safety switch 2300 mA with MOBILE connected fre quency inverters up to 4 kVA input voltage 1 x 230 V which controls alternating and pulsating DC leakage current AC DC sensitive This type of FI safety switch has this symbol x When using a fault current protective device Fl safety switch you should check its com patibility with the frequency inverter Compatibility information for each device type lt 1 phase devices Permissible are pulsed current sensitive Fl safety switches type A or AC DC sensitive safety switches type B lt 3 phase devices Only AC DC sensitive safety switches type B are allowed Otherwise another safety measure has to be deployed such as the use of double or rein forced isolation to disconnect from the environment network disconnection or similar EN 50178 The release current of the Fl safety s
199. nd via the serial link or the Stop key on the digital keypad is used to reset faults Range see table Default By DI Kypd Input Phase Fit Address 0851 This parameter configures whether the drive will monitor for an input phase failure If the drive is fed direct current through the B B terminals or DB1 B terminals depend ing on model see page 31 for more information the message Mains Missing will be dis played This is not a fault rather it is a message that will cease being displayed if the value of this parameter is set to Disabled The following functions may be assigned Display Function The drive will not detect input phase failure You must assign this func Disabled tion if a 3 phase 230 V AC WF2 model is used on a 1 phase 230 V AC line Fault When an input phase failure is detected a fault occurs the drive will stop Range see table Default Fault External Fault Address 0853 When a digital input is configured for an external fault see pages 111 and 113 this param eter configures whether the fault is treated as a warning or a fault The following functions may be assigned 07 11 03 08 GB TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 Fault Management Group Parameters 07 11 03 08 GB Display Function Disabled The drive will not detect external faults When an external fault is detected a warning is is
200. ng 0 75 Input Voltage 115 V AC Single Phase X 230 V AC Single Phase X 230 V AC Three Phase X 460 V AC Three Phase X 575 V AC Three Phase X 1 5 X 2 2 X 3 7 5 5 75 11 0 15 0 18 5 22 0 XXX OK X OK OK OK Xx Xx 30 0 37 0 45 0 55 0 2X OK OK X X X XXX x x KY x lt 2X XK OK X OK OK OK KL OK KK x lt With over 200 parameters the WF2 drive is capable of handling a wide variety of applica tions All parameters are available via the keypad on the drive however security may be enabled to prevent unauthorized access to the parameters 2 2 Manual Overview This manual contains specifications receiving and installation instructions configuration description of operation and troubleshooting procedures for WF2 drives TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB 2 3 Publication History 07 11 03 08 GB Date Publication Nature of Change 08 05 02 08 GB Version corresponds to TBW Form 1346D 05 11 02 08 GB Version corresponds to TBW Form 1346E 07 11 03 08 GB Version corresponds to TBW Form 1346G TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 Technical Characteristics 3 Technical Characteristics 3 1 Interpreting Model Numbers The model
201. ng bits 0 or 1 of Cntl Word 1 to 1 the control path Nuno SO may be switched to the serial link The SLO function is also available for overriding serial link control Note that if this setting is selected the Remote Config parameter is automatically set to Serial Lnk o Range see table Default Keypd C amp R Remote Config Address 0409 This parameter sets the source for reference speed and control functions when Remote mode is active see the Local Remote parameter on page 86 for more information The fol lowing functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Terminal Strip Control amp Reference TS C amp R Inputs from the terminal strip set the reference speed and control op eration Keypad Reference and Terminal Strip Control Kpd R TS C The reference speed is set from the keypad and operation is controlled by digital inputs Terminal Strip Reference and Keypad Control TS R Kpd C The reference speed is controlled by digital inputs and operation is set from the keypad Non Serial Link Reference and Serial Link Control NM R Ser C The reference speed is set by either the keypad or terminal strip and operation is controlled by commands sent via serial communication Serial Link Reference and Terminal Strip Control TS C Ser R The reference speed is set via communication across the serial link and operation is controlled by inputs to the terminal strip Serial Link Contro
202. ng for shorts to ground 18 Overcurrent The drive has measured excessive cur Check the load motor size and cables rent in the motor output This may be Review the settings for acceleration caused by and deceleration times Sudden heavy load increase Shortcircuit in the motor cables Unsuitable motor 19 Drive Over Temp Temperature of the drive s heatsink is too e Check the air flow high lt Check that the heatsink is not clogged lt Check the ambient temperature lt Check that the switching frequency is not too high compared to ambient tem perature and load 20 Motor OverLoad Excessive load on the motor for example Check the motor and load a jammed load 21 Drive Under Temp Temperature of the drive s heatsink is e Increase the ambient temperature below 10 C 14 F Ensure thatthe ribbon cable is correctly Ribbon cable not correctly seated be Seated tween the power and control boards 22 Motor Stall The motor s stall protection sensed a stall Check the motor Fault severe enough to cause a fault 23 Motor Underload The load on the motor is so insufficient for Check the motor and load Fault example a broken conveyor belt that a fault occurs 24 ITSP 10V Ref 10 V reference for the analog inputis over Ensure that the total load on the 10 loaded terminal does not exceed 20 mA DC e Check for correct connection of device
203. ni cations changed the values of the other two bits only preset speeds 1 through 3 plus the reference speed would be available Digital Input Configured as PS In 41 Speed Selected 0 Reference Speed 1 Preset Speed 1 Table 20 Selection of Preset Speeds One Digital Input Digital js x dea as Digital go M ia as Speed Selected 0 0 Reference Speed 0 1 Preset Speed 1 1 0 Preset Speed 2 1 1 Preset Speed 3 Table 21 Selection of Preset Speeds Two Digital Inputs TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Connections Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Configured as Configured as Configured as Speed Selected PS In 3 PS In 2 PS In 1 0 0 0 Reference Speed 0 0 1 Preset Speed 1 0 1 0 Preset Speed 2 0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 1 0 0 Preset Speed 4 1 0 1 Preset Speed 5 1 1 0 Preset Speed 6 1 1 1 Preset Speed 7 Table 22 Selection of Preset Speeds Three Digital Inputs State of Bit 7 of State of Bit 6 of State of Bit 5 of Speed Selected Cntl Word 1 Cntl Word 1 Cntl Word 1 0 0 0 Reference Speed 0 0 1 Preset Speed 1 0 1 0 Preset Speed 2 0 1 1 Preset Speed 3 1 0 0 Preset Speed 4 1 0 1 Preset Speed 5 1 1 0 Preset Speed 6 1 1 1 Preset Speed 7 Table 23 Selection of Preset Speeds Using Serial Comm
204. nning at one tenth of the maximum frequency direct current would be applied for only 2 seconds 10 of 20 s NOTE If this parameter is set to zero direct current will be applied until the enable input DI EN is de activated To re start the enable input must be restored to its active condition and then the Run command re issued This parameter is independent of the DC Inj Config parameter and the other parameters associated with that parameter In other words the time period configured by this parame ter DC Inj Time Stp does not determine how long DC injection braking will be active When DC injection braking is controlled by a digital input or by setting bit 12 of Cntl Word 1 the braking continues as long as the digital input or bit is true when it is controlled by frequency it continues for the length of time set by parameter DC Inj Time Frq Range 0 00 60 00 s Default 0 20 s DC Inj Freq Address 0414 If parameter DC Inj Config is set to DCI on Frg or DCI DI Frq a frequency threshold is used for DC braking This parameter sets the value of the frequency threshold See parameter DC Inj Config on page 108 for more information Range 0 00 25 00 Hz Default 0 00 Hz DC Inj Time Frq Address 0416 If parameter DC Inj Config is set to DCI on Frg or DCI DI Frq a frequency threshold is used for DC braking Once the threshold is crossed DC braking is initiated and continues for the amount of time specified by this parameter
205. nsfer of control and reference from the terminal strip to the keypad T K by Fkey is accomplished by pressing the enhanced keypad function key MON F1 OPR F2 PAR F3 or DIR F4 configured for this function see page 129 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 85 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters 86 Control Modes Group Display T K SerLnk Function Terminal Strip Keypad Switching by Serial Link Serial communication is used to set Bit 11 of parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 133 to 0 or 1 with O selecting the keypad as the control path and 1 selecting the terminal strip as the control path 0 Range see table Default Kypd C amp R Local Remote Address 0407 This parameter determines whether Local and Remote modes will be active and how swit ching between the two modes is accomplished See page 70 for information on how Local and Remote modes may be used to determine control paths Display None Function Local and Remote modes are not used parameters Terminal Keypad and Cntl Word 1 determine the control path L R by DI A digital input selects between Local and Remote modes L R by Fkey Transfer of control between Local and Remote modes is accomplished by pressing the enhanced keypad function key MON F1 OPR F2 PAR F3 or DIR F4 configured for this function see page 129 L R SerLnk Serial communicatio
206. ntage of the torque load Range 1 200 Default 150 Trq Lim Reg Fwd Address 0333 This parameter sets the torque limiting point when the drive is in regenerative mode in the Forward direction The limit is expressed as a percentage of the torque load Range 1 200 Default 80 Trq Lim Mtr Rev Address 0334 This parameter sets the torque limiting point when the drive is in motoring mode in the Re verse direction The limit is expressed as a percentage of the torque load Range 1 200 Default 150 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters Drive Output Group Trq Lim Reg Rev Address 0335 This parameter sets the torque limiting point when the drive is in regenerative mode in the Reverse direction The limit is expressed as a percentage of the torque load Range 1 200 Default 8096 Trq Lim Freq Address 0602 When parameter Trq Limit Type is set to On Freq the Torque Limit feature will activate when a certain frequency threshold is exceeded This parameter Trq Lim Freq sets the threshold frequency Range 0 0 320 0 Hz Default 0 0 Hz Trq Lim Al Address 0603 When parameter Trq Limit Type is set to Follow Al an analog input is used to set the torque limits This parameter Trq Lim Al sets which analog input will be used The follow ing values may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Al 1 Analog input 1 of the WF2 drive Al
207. number of the WF2 drive appears on the shipping carton label and on the tech nical data label affixed to the model The information provided by the model number is shown below WF2 K 2000 7 B WF2 Series Torque Input Voltage Motor Power Rating Enclosure 3 2 Power and Current Ratings WF2 K 20 00 7 B K Constant 1S 2115 V AC 10 single phase 2S 230V AC 15 single phase 20 230 V AC 15 three phase 40 460 V AC 15 three phase 50 575V AC 15 three phase For example 00 7 0 75 kW 4 B IP31 NEMA 1 with keypad D IP55 NEMA 12 with keypad N IP66 with keypad complies with NSF and BISSC certification Motor Power Maximum Input Current A Output Current A Model Constant Variable Constant Variable Constant Variable Input Output Number Torque Torque Voltage Torque Torque Voltage Torque Torque WF2K ama PA UE 200 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 200 V 230 V 200 V 230 V AC AC AC AC AC AC AC AC 1 phase 1 1 E Z 1S00 7x 0 75 1 0 0 75 1 0 115 V AC 10 15 0 15 0 4 2 4 2 2500 7x 0 75 1 0 0 75 1 0 8 9 8 0 8 9 8 0 4 8 4 2 4 8 4 2 1 phase 2801 5x 1 5 2 0 1 5 2 0 200 230 V AC 16 2 14 6 16 2 14 6 7 8 6 8 7 8 6 8 O 2S02 2x 2 2 3 0 2 2 3 0 c did 23 0 20 7 23 0 20 7 11 0 9 6 11 0 9 6 200
208. o be set to Step Change Function key F2 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F2 Key Config F2 Key must also be set to Step Change Function key F3 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F3 Key Config F3 Key must also be set to Step Change Function key F4 on the enhanced keypad Parameter F4 Key Config F4 Key must also be set to Step Change Enter Key The Enter key Parameter Enter Key must also be setto Step Change Time After the duration specified by parameters Seq Time min n and Seq Time sec n DI6 Time Either digital input D6 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DI7 Time Either digital input D7 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DI8 Time Either digital input D8 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DI9 Time Either digital input D9 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses DI10 Time Either digital input D10 set to Step Change or the configured time elapses AltL Time Either the signal input to analog input 1 goes below the value set in pa rameter Al Low Thres n or the configured time elapses Al2H Time Either the signal input to analog input 2 goes above the value set in pa rameter Al High Thres n or the configured time elapses Fi Time F function key 1 set to Step Change or the configured time elaps F2 Time E function key 2 set to Step Change or the configured time elaps 0 Range see table Default Disabled Al Low Thres n Address See chapter 11 This parameter configures
209. of malfunctions the Discharge time of 5 minutes may be ex ceeded substantially TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB The drive converter contains protective facilities that deactivate it in the event of malfunc tions whereby the motor is de energized and comes to a standstill so called coasting of the motor is possible depending on the rotating mass of the type of drive involved Stand still of the motor can however also be produced by mechanical blockage Voltage fluctua tions and particularly line power failures may also lead to deactivation In certain circum stances the drive may start up automatically once the cause of the fault has been reme died As a result of this certain systems may be damaged or destroyed and there may be a risk for operators working on the system Installations which include drive converters shall be equipped with additional control and protective devices in accordance with the relevant applicable safety requirements e g Act respecting technical equipment accident preven tion rules etc Changes to the drive converters by means of the operating software are Ad missible The motor may be stopped during operation by disabling it or by deactivating the setpoint whereby the drive converter and motor may remain live If inadvertent start up of the mo tor must be excluded to protect operating personnel electronic interlocking by dis abling
210. of this parameter was set to 50 the range for A would start at 10 mA rather than 4 mA Range 0 100 Default 20 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 121 Parameters Fault Management Group 7 20 Fault Management Group HINT 122 This group contains parameters that configure what faults are available the optional dy namic brake and how one recovers from fault conditions Man Fault Reset Address 0864 When a fault occurs and auto resetting is not enabled this parameter configures how the fault may be reset manually Note that if you configure the STOP key to reset faults an ac tive fault display must be shown on the keypad for the STOP key to reset a fault The follow ing functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function None Faults cannot be reset manually A digital input is configured to act as a fault reset See page 110 for in By DI Wk wi formation on configuring a digital input for this purpose By Keypad The STOP key on the digital keypad on the drive is used to reset faults By Ser Lnk A command via the serial link resets faults By DI Kypd Either a digital input or the STOP key is used to reset faults Either a digital input or a command via the serial link is used to reset By Dl Ser Lnk faults Either the Stop key or a command via the serial link is used to reset By Kpd Ser Lnk faults By DI Ser Kypd Either a digital input a comma
211. ol path or override this parameter by setting bits O and or 1 of parameter Cntl Word 1 to 1 to allow the serial link to be used to select the control path As shown on page 85 where the Terminal Keypad parameter is described the first four functions for this parameter allow you to select the control path directly in the first two func tions the control path is the same for frequency reference and start stop commands the next two functions permit different control paths for each Kypd C amp R The keypad is both the source for control functions and for the reference frequency The Operate display on the keypad shows KYP to denote this selection TS C amp R Inputs to the terminal strip are the source for both control functions and the reference frequency The Operate display on the keypad shows TRM to denote this selection KP C TS R The keypad is the source for control functions while inputs to the terminal strip are the source for the reference frequency The Operate display on the keypad shows KST to denote this selection TS C KP R Inputs to the terminal strip perform control functions while the keypad is the source for the reference frequency The Operate display on the keypad shows TSK to denote this selection These four settings are particularly useful when the application does not require a control path that can be altered on the fly They assign the control path for the reference frequen cy and start stop commands to
212. on 230 V AC Models 460 V AC Models 575 V AC Models 180 4 380 11 480 16 200 l 5 400 12 500 17 208 6 415 13 525 18 220 7 440 14 575 19 230 8 460 15 600 20 240 9 480 16 250 10 1 This setting is only available with units having MCP software revisions greater than 1 59 0 Range see table Default varies 7 15 Braking Options Group This parameter group contains parameters that are used to configure the various braking options for the drive DB Config Address 0630 The drive provides an internal dynamic brake DB to assist in stopping If desired a TB Wood s WDB type external brake may be connected to the B B terminals or B DB1 ter minals depending on model on the power board see page 31 for more information The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled Neither an internal dynamic brake or external device is used Int DB Res The internal dynamic brake is enabled A TB Wood s WDB type external braking kit is attached to the WF2 Ext DB WDB drive for additional braking capacity see page 145 for more informa tion An external resistor is used for additional braking capacity The char acteristics of the external resistor are specified in the following three PAI DB RES parameters See page 34 for a discussion of dynamic braking for the WF2 drive and how to add an external resisto
213. onfigures what function is performed by digital input D2 If 3 wire control is selected in parameter 2 Wire 3 Wire see page 83 or if the Sequencer application is turned on that is parameter Application is set to Sequencer the D2 termi nal is forced to act as a Stop input it should not be configured to perform any other function However if 2 wire control is selected any of the following functions may be assigned to this parameter provided the Sequencer application is not turned on Display Function Not Assign No input on terminal D2 Forward Command the Forward direction Stop Command a Stop Jog Start jogging operation Reverse Command the Reverse direction Jog Revers Start jogging operation in Reverse PS In 1 Set reference to Preset Speed 1 PS In 42 Set reference to Preset Speed 2 PS In 43 Set reference to Preset Speed 3 Alt Rmp 1 Activate Alternate Ramp 1 Alt Rmp 2 Activate Alternate Ramp 2 EMOP Spd EMOP increase speed EMOP Spd EMOP decrease speed T K Switch Switch from terminal strip to keypad control L R Switch Switch from Local to Remote mode 110 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 07 11 03 08 GB Digital Inputs Group Parameters Display Function DC Inject Begin DC injection braking Torque Lim Activate Torque Limit mode SL Override Takes control away from the s
214. or the reference frequency for start stop commands or for both This is ac complished by setting Bit O and or Bit 1 of parameter Cntl Word 1 to 1 See section 6 6 for more information When either of these bits are set to 1 the SLO serial link override function also becomes available which is used to temporarily halt serial link control of the drive see the next sec tion for more information on the SLO function Once Bit 1 is set to 1 the reference frequency is determined by Bit 4 of parameter Cntl Word 1 When this bit is set to 0 the value of parameter Ext Freq Ref 1 determines the reference frequency when the bit is set to 1 the value of parameter Ext Freq Ref 2 deter mines the reference frequency 6 7 4 Override of Serial Link Control You may temporarily halt serial link control by assigning a digital input to perform the SLO serial link override function See page 110 for information on configuring digital inputs When the digital input assigned to the SLO function becomes true the status of Bit 0 and Bit 1 of parameter Cntl Word 1 are ignored serial link control is halted and the control path reverts to that specified by parameter Terminal Keypad Note that if serial link is explicitly assigned in either the Local Config or Remote Config parameter the SLO function is not available Should serial link control be lost the drive will either fault if the Comm Timeout parameter is set see page 132 or will continue runnin
215. owing values may be displayed for this parameter Displayed Name Type of Drive WF2C A constant horsepower rated WF2 drive WF2K A constant kilowatt rated WF2 drive WF2C N A constant horsepower rated NSF certified WF2 drive WF2K N A constant kilowatt rated NSF certified WF2 drive Range Default Catalog Number Read Only Address 0001 This parameter contains the portion of the WF2 model number related to voltage and horse power The number has the format vvhhf where vv is the code for the input voltage 19 115 V AC singlephase 29 230 V AC single phase 20 230 V AC three phase 40 460 V AC three phase 50 575 V AC three phase hh is the horsepower and f is the frac tional part of the horsepower For example 29010 indicates a 230 V AC single phase 1 0 HP model Range 0 65535 Default TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Drive ID Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Serial No 1 Read Only Address 0005 This parameter contains a four digit number that corresponds to the year and week in which the WF2 drive was manufactured Range 0 9952 Default Serial No 2 Read Only Address 0006 This parameter contains a four digit number that is the remainder of the serial number pa rameter Serial No 1 is the first part of the number see above Range 0 32767 Default MCP Sw Version Read Only Addr
216. parameter values are shown below Sample display for Sample display for parameters assigned a value parameters assigned a function Maximum Freq 0303 120Hz Enter or 320 Name of Parameter 0 Parameter Parameter Current Parameter List of Current Address Range Value Address Available Functions Value 5 Change the displayed value to the desired value For parameters that configure a func tion use the up or down arrow key to move the cursor to the desired function and then press ENT Note that the second line does not show the function just configured instead it shows a number corresponding to its position in the function list with O being the first function listed For parameters that are assigned a value use the numeric keypad to key in the param eter s value Alternately you may scroll to the desired value by using the up or down arrow keys 6 Press ENT to save the new value If you do not wish to save the selected value press ESC to abort and return to the display showing the parameters in the parameter group 7 After configuring the value of the parameter the list of parameters will return to the dis play You may now select another parameter to configure or press ESC to return to the list of parameter groups To return to the Operate Mode press SHIFT OPR F2 or nav igate to it via the Menu Display mode The Menu Display Mode The Menu Display Mode may be thought of as the hub on which all
217. put frequency is shown in the display See figure 23 on page Py 56 for an example of this display A custom unit may be created using the User Units Mult User Units User Units Div User Label 1 User Label 2 and User Label 3 parameters and displayed on the keypad See below for information on these parame ters 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 127 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters 128 Display Options Group Display Function The display shows retention time which is a reciprocal function of the normal speed frequency proportional output The displayed value for the retention time RDV is derived by dividing the value of User Units Mult UUM by the value of User Units Div UUD and then multiplying the result by the quotient of the Maximum Frequency FMAX divided Reten Ti ist RUE by 10 times the operating frequency FOUT As an equation this is represented as follows RDV UUM Maximum Frequency UUD 10x FOUT Range see table Default Std Disply User Units Mult Address 0956 This parameter may be used in creating a custom unit that is displayed on the keypad The value stored in this parameter multiplies the displayed frequency value For example to show speed in revolutions per minute for an 1800 rpm motor the Display Mode parameter would be set to User Units and the User Units Mult parameter would be set to 30 The default value for the User Units Div parameter
218. put initiates Run Reverse See page 41 for more infor mation 0 Range see table Default Non revers Terminal Keypad Address 0406 This parameter allows you to configure whether reference speed Reference and control functions Control come from the keypad inputs on the terminal strip or a combination of the two Settings are also provided for switching between the two control paths See page 69 for information on configuring control paths by using this parameter The following func tions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Keypad Control amp Reference The keypad is the source for both the reference speed by the up and Pen down keys and control inputs by the FWD REV if enabled and STOP keys Terminal Strip Control amp Reference TS C 8 R Inputs from the terminal strip set the reference speed and control op eration Terminal Strip Control amp Keypad Reference TS C KP R The reference speed is set from the keypad and operation is controlled by digital inputs of the terminal strip Keypad Control amp Terminal Strip Reference KP C TS R The reference speed is set by inputs from the terminal strip while the keys on the keypad control drive operation Terminal Strip Keypad Switching by DI T K by DI A digital input selects whether the keypad or the terminal strip is the source for control and the reference speed Terminal Strip Keypad Switching by Enhance Keypad FKey Tra
219. r allows you to use the ENTER key on the keypad as a toggle switch between different control or operating states The following functions may be assigned to this param eter Display Function Disabled The ENTER key does not work as a toggle switch L R Switch Switches between Local and Remote modes T K Switch Switches the control path between the terminal strip and the keypad PID Enable Enables PID control SL Override Overrides serial link control Default Disabled 7 8 Speed Reference Group 88 0 Range 0 Hz to Maximum Freq This group contains parameters that allow you to configure the reference speed for the drive as well as for jogging operations Minimum Freq Address 0301 This parameter sets the minimum frequency that may be output to the motor Note that the resolution is 1 Hz Also note that if the value of this parameter is changed the value of pa rameters A1 Span and A2 Span will be affected as well See pages 114 and 115 for more information on these parameters Default 0 Hz TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Speed Reference Group 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters Maximum Freq Address 0303 This parameter sets the maximum frequency that may be output to the motor Note that the resolution is 1 Hz Also note that if the value of this parameter is changed the value of pa rameters A1 Span and A2 Span will be affected as well See pages 114
220. r the most recent fault is stored in parameter Fault History 1 the code for the oldest fault is stored in param eter Fault History 9 When a new fault occurs the value of parameter Fault History 1 is moved to Fault History 2 the former value of Fault History 2 is moved to Fault History 3 and so on up to Fault History 9 The code that was stored in parameter Fault History 9 is discarded Range 0 100 Default TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 13 O Parameters Ungrouped Parameters Active Fault 1 Read Only Address 0110 Active Fault 2 Read Only Address 0111 Active Fault 3 Read Only Address 0112 Active Fault 4 Read Only Address 0113 Active Fault 5 Read Only Address 0114 Active Fault 6 Read Only Address 0115 These parameters store the codes of up to six faults that are currently active See Section 8 for the list of fault codes If more than six faults are active the remaining faults are not recorded These parameters will be cleared when the drive is reset 0 Range 0 100 Default TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 140 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 8 1 WF2Fault Codes Table 29 shows the fault codes that may be displayed along with suggestions for recover ing from the fault condition Fault Code Fault Name Possible Cause s How to Recover 01
221. r to the drive 0 Range see table Default Int DB Res 1 06 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Braking Options Group Parameters DB Res Value Address 0632 DB Rth Value Address 0633 DB Cth Value Address 0634 These parameters establish the value of the external resistor used to augment braking ca pacity its thermal resistance and its thermal capacitance respectively Note that the value for DB Res Value is the actual resistance of the resistor displayed to the nearest 0 1 O resolution Also note that the default Cth values are for software versions 1 63 and greater earlier soft ware versions 1 59 1 62 have Cth values that are twice as large This manual is intended for MCP revision 2 86 and greater The default values for these parameters varies by model as shown in the table below Model WF2K DB Res Value DB Rth Value DB Cth Value 2500 7B D 250 19 65000 2501 5B D 125 60 8000 2502 2B D 125 22 5000 2S00 7N thru 2502 2N 125 30 12500 2000 7B D 250 19 65000 2001 5B D 125 60 8000 2002 2B D and 2003 7B D 125 22 5000 2005 5B D and 2007 5B D 60 45 3000 2011 0B D and 2015 0B D 120 87 2200 2018 5B D and 2022 0B D 30 125 1900 2000 7N thru 2003 7N 125 30 12500 2005 5N and 2007 5N 60 12 13500 2011 0N 60 12 13500 4000 7B D 1000 19 65000 4001 5B D 500 60 8000 4002 2B D and 4003 7
222. ral contribution to the total output expressed as a percentage of the maximum frequency Range 0 100 Default PID D Part Read Only Address 0676 This parameter shows the amount of the derivative contribution to the total output ex pressed as a percentage of the maximum frequency Range 0 100 Default 7 25 Ungrouped Parameters 9 07 11 03 08 GB The following parameters are not found in a parameter group and cannot be read with the simple keypad nor with the enhanced keypad when it is in the Parameter mode Instead these parameters may be read with the enhanced keypad when it is in the Direct Parameter Access mode by entering the parameter address or via serial communication Drive Family Read Only Address 0998 This parameter stores a code signifying the drive family For the WF2 inverter it is set to 6 to signify a WF2 series inverter Range 0 10 Default Fault History 1 Read Only Address 0100 Fault History 2 Read Only Address 0101 Fault History 3 Read Only Address 0102 Fault History 4 Read Only Address 0103 Fault History 5 Read Only Address 0104 Fault History 6 Read Only Address 0105 Fault History 7 Read Only Address 0106 Fault History 8 Read Only Address 0107 Fault History 9 Read Only Address 0108 These parameters comprise a fault history log Each parameter stores a code signifying the fault that occurred see Section 8 for the list of fault codes The code fo
223. rameters Parameter Name rosea Range Default S ius Puede Disabled 0 DI6 1 DI7 2 DI8 3 DI9 4 DI10 5 Ali Low 6 Al High 7 AI2 Low 8 Goto X Step 1 3017 AI2 High 9 Goto X Step 2 3037 AI1L AI1H 10 Goto X Step 3 3057 DI10 AHL 11 Goto X Step 4 3077 DI9 AI2H 12 Goto X Step 5 3097 F1 Key 13 Goto X Step 6 9117 F2 Key 14 Disables ie Goto X Step 7 3137 F3 Key 15 Goto X Step 8 3157 F4 Key 16 Goto X Step 9 3177 Enter Key 17 Goto X Step 10 3197 Time 18 DI6 Time 19 DI7 Time 20 DI8 Time 21 DI9 Time 22 DI10 Time 23 Al1L Time 24 AI2H Time 25 F1 Time 26 F2 Time 27 Al Low Thres 1 3018 Al Low Thres 2 3038 Al Low Thres 3 3058 Al Low Thres 4 3078 Al Low Thres 5 3098 Al Low Thres 6 3118 0 00 100 00 0 00 154 Al Low Thres 7 3138 Al Low Thres 8 3158 Al Low Thres 9 3178 Al Low Thres 10 3198 Al High Thres 1 3019 Al High Thres 2 3039 Al High Thres 3 3059 Al High Thres 4 3079 Al High Thres 5 3099 a Al High Thres 6 3119 0 00 100 00 0 00 155 Al High Thres 7 3139 Al High Thres 8 3159 Al High Thres 9 3179 Al High Thres 10 3199 Table 32 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 177 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Summary of WF2 Parameters Memory See User Parameter Name Address Range Default Page Setting X Step 1 3020 Sie X Step 2 3040 RM 2 2 X
224. rameters that are available at the configured security level press SHIFT PROG to initiate Level 2 programming and then navigate to the Enter Password parameter which is in the Security Group Once this parameter is displayed press the up or down key to set the displayed value to the value of the password and then press the Enter key TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Set up and Getting Started After the Enter key is pressed the drive compares the value of Enter Password with that in the Set Password parameter If they match the user is granted access at the level set by the Access Level parameter If they do not match access is granted but with Read Only status Note that if the WF2 drive is power cycled while the parameters are unlocked or if the Pro gramming mode reverts to the Operate mode due to inactivity the parameters will become locked again You must re enter the password to configure the settings of the accessible parameters Enhanced Keypad When a user attempts to navigate to the Parameter mode or Direct Parameter Access mode a prompt will appear asking for the password Type the password and press ENTER If the password is accepted the desired mode is entered Note that if the WF2 drive is power cycled while the parameters are unlocked or if the Pa rameter mode or Direct Parameter Access mode reverts to the Operate mode due to inac tivity the parameters will beco
225. re 28 Enhanced Keypad Display and Information Shown for the Operate Mode 64 To configure the value of a parameter in this mode follow these steps 1 When the Parameter Mode is first entered after power up the parameter groups will be listed in the order shown in table 27 on page 75 starting with the first group Security On subsequent entries to this mode the parameter groups will appear in the same order but will start with the last parameter group accessed Use the down arrow key to move the cursor down the list until the desired parameter group is reached Press ENT 4 The parameters in the selected parameter group will now be displayed starting with the first parameter in the group Use the down arrow key to scroll to the desired parameter Press ENT The value of the parameter will now be shown on the second line of the display Note that this value may be an actual number such as 120 Hz or a function such as 2 wire If the value is an actual number the fourth line will show the range for the parameter If the value is a function a range is not provided Typical displays for parameter values are shown below TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Parameter Parameter Current Parameter Set up and Getting Started Sample display for Sample display for parameters assigned a value parameters assigned a function Name of Parameter Enter
226. rehensive set of parameters to allow you to use the drive in nearly any industrial application While the drive can meet the requirements of many ap plications right out of the box customization of parameter values to better suit your partic ular application is easily accomplished with the standard keypad with the enhanced key pad or via serial communication This section describes the two keypads and remote communication as well as setting up security for the WF2 drive and programming control paths 6 2 Description of the Standard Keypad 07 11 03 08_GB Overview The standard keypad is shipped with non NSF certified WF2 models It is located on the face of the WF2 drive and provides local control and programming of the drive Figure 22 shows the keypad This keypad provides access to a comprehensive set of parameters that allow the WF2 drive to meet the needs of almost any application To make customization as simple as pos sible two levels of programming are available 2 Line by 16 Character Display RUN WARNING FAULT PROG POWER O O O O O Figure 22 The Standard Keypad for WF2 Drives The first level called Level 1 Programming provides access to the most often needed pa rameters The second level called Level 2 Programming provides access to all WF2 pa rameters including those found in Level 1 Programming See section 7 starting on page 74 for more information on these two programming levels In addition if d
227. req Config 5 Freq Config 6 Freq Config 7 Freq Config 8 Freq Config 9 Pipa Gong Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Page 150 Fixed Freq 1 Fixed Freq 2 Fixed Freq 3 Fixed Freq 4 Fixed Freq 5 Fixed Freq 6 Fixed Freq 7 Fixed Freq 8 Fixed Freq 9 Fixed Freq 10 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Dir Control 1 Dir Control 2 Dir Control 3 Dir Control 4 Dir Control 5 Dir Control 6 Dir Control 7 Dir Control 8 Dir Control 9 Dir Control 10 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Time min 1 Time min 2 Time min 3 Time min 4 Time min 5 Time min 6 Time min 7 Time min 8 Time min 9 Time min 10 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Seq Time sec 1 Time sec 2 Time sec 3 Time sec 4 Time sec 5 Time sec 6 Time sec 7 Time sec 8 Time sec 9 Time sec 10 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Ramp Select 1 Select 2 Select 3 Select 4 Select 5 Select 6 Select 7 Select 8 Select 9 Select 10 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151 Page 151
228. rformance match the system 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 183 Fundamentals of PID Control 184 Next examine the transient or short term effects that are common on all real world sys tems Use the calibrator to change the feedback signal by some value for a measured in terval with the value and duration approximating the real system For example say 1 V for 5 seconds was selected By monitoring parameter PID Feedback either via the keypad or via an analog output configured for PID feedback the effect of the feedback signal may be observed The value of this parameter should increase and then settle back to its original value or perhaps go below that value negative The value of the parameter may go positive and negative a number of times as a response to repeated 5 second transients Tune parameter PID Int Gain to optimize this effect to suit the circum stances If necessary and with due caution use a similar technique to adjust the derivative gain Note that parameter PID Deriv Gain will immediately produce an incremental change when the feedback signal changes Set the parameter to a value that produces the desired amount of change in response to a change in the feedback signal Any changes made to this parameter should be minor as instabilities in loop performance will result if the param eter is adjusted inappropriately Finally put the transducer into the circuit and review t
229. rformed Cst to Stp A coast to stop is performed DCI to Stp A DC pulse is applied near zero speed Range see table Default Rmp to Stp Jog Mode Address 0404 This parameter allows you to configure whether jog operations will be allowed and the type of jog control utilized The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function No Jogging Jogging is not configured Run Jog DI A maintained contact is used to initiate jogging see page 42 Jog Pshbutton M pu is used to initiate jogging See page 42 for more informa 0 Range see table Default No Jogging TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Control Modes Group Parameters Reverse Mode Address 0405 This parameter allows you to configure whether the drive may operate in Reverse and if So how the direction is controlled The following functions may be assigned to this param eter Display Function The drive cannot operate in Reverse the REV key on the keypad is Non revers disabled The drive may operate in Reverse but only via digital inputs One dig For Rev DI ital input initiates Run and a second digital input selects the direction See page 41 for more information The drive may operate in Reverse whether commanded from the key pad or via digital inputs One digital input initiates Run Forward and a Run FwdRev Aber i second digital in
230. riately see page 129 for more information By Ser Lnk Setting Bit 1 of Cntl Word 2 to 1 via the serial link Range see table Default Disabled Seq Reset Address 3002 This parameter determines the means by which the Sequencer application is reset The fol lowing may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 149 Sequencer Application 0 Range see table 150 Seg Configure Group Display Function Disabled Disabled the application cannot be reset even if enabled and running Bv DI By digital input D5 which is hard coded for this function a different dig y ital input cannot be used instead of D5 By a function key on the enhanced keypad The parameter that config By F ke ures the operation of the actual function key to be used for resetting the y y application must be set appropriately see page 129 for more informa tion By Ser Lnk By setting Bit 2 of Cntl Word 2 to 1 via the serial link Each of the ten steps of the Sequencer application are configured with the same parame ters with the parameters being made unique with the addition of a number at the end of the parameter name that corresponds to the step For example parameter Freq Config 1 sets the reference frequency for step 1 while Freq Config 8 sets the reference frequency for step 8 In the following description of the parameters the step number is replaced with the let
231. rmines the shape of the ramp see below The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Range see table Display Function None AR2 is not available AR on DI A digital input is used to select AR2 While the input is true AR2 is in use When the drive reaches a preset frequency AR2 is invoked and re AR2 by Fra mains in effect until the frequency drops below the threshold The fre quency is set by parameter AR2 Switch Freq see page 95 for more information When a Start command occurs AR2 is invoked and remains in effect until the reference speed is reached Once an At Speed condition is at AR2 Strt tained the main ramp is used for reference changes When a Stop command occurs AR2 is invoked and remains in effect until zero speed is reached TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 93 Parameters 94 Display Function When the drive begins operation in Reverse AR2 is invoked and re ARE EWON mains in effect until the direction changes Range see table Default AR2 on DI Main Ramp Type Address 0452 This parameter determines the shape of the primary ramp determined by parameters Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Linear The shape of the ramp is a straight line The shape of the ramp is curved at the beginning and end with the S Cur
232. s OV Auto Reset OC Auto Reset OT Auto Reset this parameter specifies the type of start to be performed after the time delay set by parameter Auto Reset Time elaps es Note that automatic restarting of the drive can only be accomplished if a 2 wire main tained Run control scheme is used The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function The drive uses the active acceleration ramp to accelerate from zero Ramping speed to the commanded speed Flying start The drive matches the commanded speed and then enters Run mode Range see table Default Ramping Net Timeout Fit Address 0876 This parameter configures what action if any is taken when the drive is configured for serial link control of either direction or speed and it does not sense a valid serial communication telegram within the period of time specified by parameter Comm Timeout see page 132 when operating in a Modbus environment When operating in a DeviceNet environment the time duration is supplied by the DeviceNet network The following data codes may be assigned to this parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 125 Parameters 126 Fault Management Group Display Function Disabled The drive does not take any action Warning A warning is generated but the drive continues to operate Fault A fault is generated and the drive stops Range
233. s to the 10 terminal e Check for short circuits associated with devices connected to the 10 terminal Consult BERGES 25 EE Ref Checksum Parameter restoring error due to interfer Resetthe fault and attempt a restart If fault ence fault or component failure persists contact BERGES 26 EE Par Checksum Parameter restoring error due to interfer Resetthe fault and attempt a restart If fault ence fault or component failure persists contact BERGES 27 EEPROM Check Parameter restoring error due to interfer Reset the fault and attempt a restart If fault sum ence fault or component failure persists contact your local distributor or BERGES 28 Outpt Phase Loss Current measurement detected a motor Check motor cables phase with no current 29 Precharge Fault Consult BERGES Consult BERGES Table 29 142 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Troubleshooting Fauli Fault Name Possible Cause s How to Recover Code 30 TRIN Fit ASIC Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 31 Satur Flt ASIC Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 32 Empty Trp ASIC Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 33 Appl Change Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 34 High Unbal Curr Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 35 MCP Software Consult BERGES Consult BERGES 36 Loss Freq Ref The drive detected the loss of the refer Restore the re
234. sed along with the down arrow key SC The ESC key is used to discard any changes made and move up one level The ENT key is used to save the new value of a parameter After sav ing the new value the display moves up one level MENU m m Z m This key causes the Menu Display to be shown from which other key pad modes may be selected See page 66 for more information TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved Table 25 Functions of the Keys on the Enhanced Keypad 61 WF2 0 75 55 0 Set up and Getting Started 62 Key Description REV The REV key if enabled by parameter Reverse Mode see page 85 commands the motor to begin running in the Reverse direction FWD The FWD key commands the motor to begin running in the Forward di rection The STOP key if enabled by parameter Stop Key see page 88 com mands the motor to stop using the type of stop configured by parame ter Stop Mode see page 84 and using the active deceleration ramp If a fault occurs the STOP key resets the fault STOP Table 25 Functions of the Keys on the Enhanced Keypad 6 4 5 Modes and Displays of the Enhanced Keypad The enhanced keypad provides a variety of modes to assist you in monitoring and control ling a WF2 drive The principal modes of the enhanced keypad are as follows The Operate Mode The Monitor Mode The Parameter Mode The Direct Parameter A
235. see page 118 The default setting is for the relay to activate when a fault is detected Drv Flted The contact ratings are 115 V AC at 1 A or 230 V AC at 0 5 A NC1 Normally closed contact for the first auxiliary relay It will open when the re lay is activated NO1 Normally open contact for the first auxiliary relay It will close when the relay is activated TB3 Terminal Block RC2 Common terminal for the second auxiliary relay The function of the relay is set by parameter R2 Configure see page 118 The default setting is for the relay to activate when the drive is running The contact ratings are 115 V AC at 1 A or 230 V AC at 0 5 A NC2 Normally closed contact for the second auxiliary relay It will open when the relay is activated NO2 Normally open contact for the second auxiliary relay It will close when the relay is activated TB4 Terminal Block EN Enable terminal A jumper is placed between this terminal and the 24 ter minal at the factory You may replace this with a contact if desired The cir cuit from EN to 24 must be closed for the drive to operate Note that unlike all other terminals this terminal cannot be configured for pull down logic That is a high inputto this terminal is always regarded as true and must be present if the drive is to operate D3 to D10 D2 Digital inputs The function of a digital input is configured by the parameter with
236. see table Default Disabled DC Volt Fit Cfg Address 0877 This parameter configures what action if any is taken when the drive senses that the DC voltage is outside of normal limits on power up The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function The drive does not take any action The drive will display NOT Disabled READY A warning is generated When the condition clears the drive will Warning resume operation Fault A fault is generated and the drive stops Range see table Default Fault Auto Res Delay Address 0878 This parameter imposes a delay in the drive s process of auto resetting a fault This is often needed to accommodate the limitations of a driven machine Once the time duration of the imposed delay elapses a re start will be attempted using the type of start specified by the Auto Reset Strt parameter see page 125 Range 0 1 3600 0 s Default 1 0 s DB Fit AR Address 0866 This parameter allows you to make the fault for the dynamic brake circuit F15 capable of being auto reset The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled The fault cannot be auto reset Enabled The fault can be auto reset Range see table Default Disabled Loss Ref AR Address 0869 This parameter allows you to make the fault for the loss of the reference signal F36 capa ble of being auto reset
237. select the parameter and display its current value After the ENTER key is pressed the value for the parameter will be displayed The WF2 drive uses two types of parameters One type is assigned a numerical value while the second type is assigned a function For example parameter Minimum Freq may range from 0 to 320 Hz and you may con figure any value within that range for the minimum frequency of the drive This is the first type of parameter where the parameter is assigned a numerical value On the other hand parameter Stop Mode only allows you to choose one of two functions Ramp to Stop or Coast to Stop This is an example of the second type of parameter The displays for these two types of parameters are slightly different as shown in figure 24 on the next page 3 If the parameter is unlocked use the up or down arrow keys to change the parameter s value to the desired value 4 Press ENTER to save the new value If you do not wish to save the new value press SHIFT The new value is stored or discarded and then the list of parameters is shown 5 You may now select another parameter or return to the Operate mode by pressing the PROG key Sample display for Sample display for parameters assigned a value parameters assigned a function MINIMUM FRI V0301 STOP MODE P0403 CST to Stp EQ Name of Parameter 160 05 Hz paa enig Can Parameter Be Changed Unlocked Yes 10 Char
238. starting on page 110 for more information In the Run Jog DI mode a maintained contact digital input is required Figure 10 shows an example of the connections for this mode with digital input D4 assigned to jogging In this example for 2 wire control if the drive is running activating D4 will cause the drive to ramp from the normal reference to the Jog reference using the appropriate acceleration or deceleration Jog ramp When D4 is deactivated the drive will ramp back to the normal reference using the appropriate acceleration or deceleration Jog ramp If the drive is stopped rather than running activating D4 and then activating the Run digital input D1 will cause the drive to start and ramp to the Jog reference using the Jog accel eration ramp When D1 is deactivated and D4 is still activated the drive will ramp to stop using the Jog deceleration ramp TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Connections TB4 TB4 CM CM ENI ENI D10 D10 D9 O D9 O D8 D8 D7 O 3 D7 al D6 5 D6 O 5 D5 O Run Jog E D5 8 D4 oO E D4 Run Jog g D3 t D3 6 5 D2 Run 5 Dal SPI LS Di Di op E g 24 24 2 24 O 24 O 24 O or NC 24 O or NC disconnect switch disconnect switch 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control Figure 10 Example of Connections for the Run Jog Mode Active
239. sued the drive con Warung tinues to operate Fault When an external fault is detected a fault occurs the drive will stop Range see table Default Disabled Motor Thrm Prot Address 0854 This parameter configures whether the drive will monitor for excessive temperature and whether excessive temperature is treated as a warning or fault The following functions may be assigned Display Function Disabled The drive will not detect excessive temperature When an overtemperature condition is detected a warning is issued Warning and the drive continues to operate Fault When an overtemperature condition is detected a fault occurs and the drive stops Range see table Default Fault Reference Fault Address 0859 This parameter configures what action is taken if any when the drive loses the Al2 signal to determine the reference speed The following functions may be assigned Display Function No Action The drive does not take any action Retain Spd The last known reference speed will remain in effect Preset Lvi The drive will ramp to the frequency set by parameter Loss Ref Freq see below Fault A fault is generated and the drive stops Range see table Default No Action Loss Ref Freq Address 0860 If parameter Reference Fault see above is set to Preset Lvl then the drive will ramp to the frequency set by this parameter when the
240. t the last group Seq Configure only becomes available when parameter Application in the Special parameter group is set to Sequencer to make the Sequencer application avail able see section 10 for more information on this application In addition for the standard keypad a 24th group is also available This group contains the most often needed parameters from the other 23 groups This 24th group is available as Level 1 Programming with the remaining 23 groups are available as Level 2 Programming See page 55 for more information on these two levels of programming The names of the parameter groups are shown in table 27 on page 75 Note that the order in which the groups are shown in the table is from the first group displayed to the last which corresponds to what is displayed as you scroll through the parameter groups with either keypad For the standard keypad table 28 on page 75 lists the parameters found in the Lev el 1 Programming group Since these parameters are duplicates of those found in the other 23 parameter groups see the noted page number for the description of the parameter TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Security Group Parameters Available in Level 1 Programming Standard Keypad Only 7 3 Security Group 07 11 03 08_GB
241. t Cfg 0877 Warning 1 Fault 126 Fault 2 Auto Res Delay 0878 0 1 3600 0 s 1 0s 126 Disabled 0 DB Fit AR 0866 Enabled 1 Disabled 126 Disabled 0 Loss Ref AR 0869 Enabled 1 Disabled 126 Disabled 0 Ext FIt AR 0870 Enabled 1 Disabled 127 Disabled 0 Mtr Ovid AR 0879 Enabled 1 Disabled 127 Display Options Group Std Disply 0 Display Mode 0955 User Units 1 Std Disply 127 Reten Time 2 User Units Mult 0956 1 32767 1 128 User Units Div 0957 1 32767 1 128 User Label 1 0958 See page 128 O space 128 User Label 2 0959 See page 128 O space 128 User Label 3 0960 See page 128 0 space 128 English 0 Espanol 1 Language 0980 Italiano 2 English 128 Deutsch 3 Disabled 0 Show Param 0979 Enabled 1 Disabled 129 Table 32 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 171 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 Summary of WF2 Parameters Parameter Name Memory Address Range Default See Page User Setting F1 Key Config 0961 Disabled 0 Loc Rem 1 Term Kpd 2 PID Enable 3 Disabled 129 F2 Key Config 0962 SL Override 4 0 Disabled 0 Loc Rem 1 Term Kpd 2 PID Enable 3 Disabled 129 F3 Key Config 0963 SL Override 4 Disabled 0 Loc Rem 1 Term Kpd 2 PID Enable 3 Disabled 129 F4 Key Config 0964 SL Override 4 Disabled 0 Loc Rem 1 Term Kpd 2 PID Enable 3 SL Override 4 Disabled 129
242. t Output Option Board By default Ref 1 maps to the A1 analog input while Ref 2 and Ref 3 map to the A2 analog input For further information see the discussion of the Ref1 Config Ref2 Config and Ref3 Config parameters on page 90 For further information on the Analog Input Output Option Board see page 145 13 2 4 Parameter Feedback Gain Parameter Feedback Gain is the feedback scaling factor It is used to scale the signal sup plied by the transducer thereby optimizing the effect of the signal on the drive 13 2 5 Parameter PID Prop Gain Parameter PID Prop Gain is the proportional feedback gain for the process control loop It determines the overall effect on the process for an incremental change in the feedback sig nal Generally when configuring this parameter you must observe the drive s response to an incremental change in the feedback input and then decide if this response is sufficient For example if the feedback input changes 1 V or 1 mA what is the drive s response Is it enough or too much TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Fundamentals of PID Control 13 2 06 Parameter PID Int Gain Parameter PID Int Gain is the integral feedback gain for the process control loop This pa rameter determines the short term effects of a change in the feedback signal over a certain amount of time This is sometimes referred to as the averaging time Generally when configuring
243. t is accurate to the hundredths place 0 01 and that if set to 0 00 the reference frequency defaults to the value of parameter Maximum Freq Range 0 00 320 00 Hz Default 0 00 Hz AR2 Ramp Type Address 0456 This parameter determines the shape of Alternate Ramp 2 AR2 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Linear The shape of the ramp is a straight line The shape of the ramp is curved at the beginning and end with the S Curve middle portion linear The degree of curvature is set by parameter AR2 S Rounding see below Range see table Default Linear AR2 S Rounding Address 0457 If parameter AR2 Ramp Type is set to S Curve this parameter determines the amount of curvature at either end of the ramp A value of O s produces a linear curve while a value of 10 s produces a maximally rounded S shaped curve Range 0 0 10 0 s Default 0 0 s AR2 Switch Freq Address 0464 This parameter sets the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration when the AR2 ramp is active Note that it is accurate to the hundredths place 0 01 and that if set to 0 00 the reference frequency defaults to the value of parameter Maximum Freq Range 0 00 320 00 Hz Default 0 00 Hz Jog Accel Time Address 0458 This parameter sets the acceleration time during jogging operations Range 0 0 3200 0 Hz Default 1 0 Hz Jog Decel Time Address 0459 This parameter s
244. t the DB Warning peak overload is applied Reduce how often the dynamic brake is used lt Check that parameters DB Res Value DB Rth Value and DB Cth Value see page 107 are correctly set Reduce the load Consult BERGES 47 DB Res Over Load Due to continuous overload the load is e Reduce the load Fault more than the DB can safely handle Consult BERGES 48 DB Res Over Load Due to continuous overload the load is Reduce the load Warning more than the DB can safely handle Consult BERGES Table 29 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 143 Troubleshooting Aen Fault Name Possible Cause s How to Recover 50 Fan Fault The cooling fan on the drive s enclosure is e Remove obstruction drawing too much current which may indi Replace fan cate that the fan is jammed or has failed 51 Fan Warning The cooling fan on the drive s enclosure is e Remove obstruction drawing excessive current but not enough to generate a fault This may indicate that the fan is jammed 52 Motor Over Temp The drive s motor temperature model de Decrease motor loading If the motor is not Warning tected motor overheating but not severe overheated check the temperature model enough to generate a fault parameters 53 Motor Stall The motor s stall protection sensed a stall Check the motor Warning but not sev
245. t to a value of 0 1 s a shear pin function will be configured When the calculated over load value exceeds that set in the Mtr Ovid Scale parameter a fault will immediately occur and the drive will stop Range 0 0 300 0 s Default 60 0 s Motor RS Address 0525 This parameter represents the motor line to line stator resistance and should only be mod ified by advanced users The default value for this parameter is calculated by the WF2 drive by using the DC pulse that occurs before a start To modify this parameter you must first disable the DC Puls Start start by setting param eter DC Pulse Start to None see below Then you may set the value of parameter Motor RS to the desired value If the DC pulse at start is not disabled any value set for parameter Motor RS will be overwritten when the WF2 measures a new value at the next start Range Default Measured by Drive DC Puls Start Address 0540 This parameter selects whether a DC pulse will be applied before starting This pulse is used to determine motor parameters before beginning operation The amount of current to be pulsed is set by parameter DC Inj Cur Lvl see page 108 and the duration of the pulse is set by parameter DC Pulse Time see below Display Function None No DC pulse before Start DC at Strt DC pulse before Start Range see table Default DC at Strt DC Pulse Time Address 0541 If parameter DC Puls Start is enabled see above this
246. tal inputs are used to change EMOP reference speed and the ref TS w Mem erence speed is retained upon Stop but not when power is cycled Digital inputs are used to change EMOP reference speed and the ref TS w MemP erence speed is retained through a Stop or when power is cycled T K no Mem Same as TS no Mem except the keypad also may be used to change the EMOP reference speed T K w Mem Same as TS w Mem except the keypad also may be used to change the EMOP reference speed Same as TS w MemP except the keypad also may be used to change T K MemP the EMOP reference speed Range see table Default None Set Fixed Speed Address 0804 When parameter Main Speed Ref or Jog Ref Config is set to Spd Fixed this parameter specifies the speed Range 0 0 320 0 Hz Default 5 0 Hz TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 91 Parameters 92 Set k Factor Address 0801 When Main Speed Ref is set to S R1 k R2 this parameter sets the value of k which is the scale factor by which reference 2 is multiplied before being added to reference 1 o Range 0 0 100 0 Default 10 0 7 9 Ramps Group This parameter group provides access to the parameters concerned with establishing the various acceleration and deceleration ramps of the drive The drive supports three ramps plus a jogging ramp Parameters are also available to set the shape of the ramps Accel Time 1 Address 0310 This parameter sets the length of ti
247. tart Stop control It is highly dynamic and changes as online conditions change If you read this parameter via the serial link O indi cates the terminal strip 1 indicates the keypad and 2 indicates the serial link Range Default Freq Ref Ctrl Read Only Address 0054 This parameter shows the active source for the setting of the reference frequency Itis high ly dynamic and changes as online conditions change If you read this parameter via the serial link O indicates the terminal strip 1 indicates the keypad and 2 indicates the serial link Range Default Drive Lifetime Read Only Address 0890 Drv Life Format Read Only Address 0891 These parameters work together to display the number of days that the WF2 drive has been under power When this parameter is read from a keypad the display will show the number of days properly formatted However when the parameter is read via serial communication you must also read parameter Drv Life Format to properly format the value To format the value divide the value shown for parameter Drive Lifetime by 1 if parameter Drv Life Format is 50 10 if parameter Drv Life Format is 51 or 100 if parameter Drv Life Format is 52 The value of the Drive Lifetime parameter cannot be reset Range 0 65535 Drive Lifetime Default Range 50 51 or 52 Drv Life Format Default Elapsed Runtime Read Only Address 0892 Runtime Format Read Only Address 0893 These
248. ted by a combina tion of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is selected Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 5 00 Hz Preset Speed 2 Address 0352 This parameter sets the second of seven preset speed The speed is selected by a com bination of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is selected Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 10 00 Hz Preset Speed 3 Address 0354 This parameter sets the third of seven preset speed The speed is selected by a combi nation of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is selected Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 20 00 Hz Preset Speed 4 Address 0356 This parameter sets the fourth of seven preset speed The speed is selected by a combi nation of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is selected Range 0 00 Hz to Maximum Freq Default 30 00 Hz Preset Speed 5 Address 0358 This parameter sets the fifth of seven preset speed The speed is selected by a combina tion of digital inputs or settings of bits 5 6 and 7 in parameter Cntl Word 1 see page 45 for a discussion of preset speeds and how each is sele
249. ter in the Level 1 group Output Freq see table 28 on page 75 if this is the first time that Level 1 programming has been initiated or the last parameter accessed will be shown lt When PROG is used in conjunction with the SHIFT key Level 2 programming is initiated See the description of the SHIFT key on the previous page lt When the list of parameter groups or the list of parameters within a group is displayed PROG causes the Operate display to be shown lt When a parameters value is displayed PROG discards any changes made to the value and causes the Operate display to be shown When PROG is used in conjunction with the STOP key the drive enters Re flash Mode see page 59 for more information on this mode The Stop key halts the operation of the WF2 drive unless it is disabled by param eter Stop Key This parameter also determines the type of stop coast or ramp that occurs when the Stop key is pressed see page 88 for more information Note that parameter Man Fault Reset see page 122 may be configured to al Sror low the Stop key to be used to manually reset the drive after a fault To use the Stop key in this way an active fault warning display must be shown in the keypad window the Stop key will not reset the drive if the Operate or Programming dis play is shown Table 24 Functions of the Keys on the Standard Keypad 6 2 3 Modes and Displays of the Standard Keypad The standard keypad provid
250. ter n See chapter 11 for the address of each of the parameters Range see table Default Disabled Freq Config n Address See chapter 11 This parameter configures the reference frequency for step n of the Sequencer application The following reference frequencies may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Spd Hf 1 Reference 1 Spd Rf 2 Reference 2 Spd Rf 3 Reference 3 Spd R1 R2 The summation of references 1 and 2 Spd R1 R3 The summation of references 1 and 3 S R1 R2 R3 The summation of all references Spd R2 R3 The summation of references 2 and 3 S R14k R2 Reference 2 is scaled by factor k and then summed with reference 1 The value of k is set by parameter Set k Factor see page 92 Spd R1 R2 The difference between references 1 and 2 Spd R2 R1 The difference between references 2 and 1 Spd R1 R3 The difference between references 1 and 3 Spd R3 R1 The difference between references 3 and 1 Spd R2 R3 The difference between references 2 and 3 Spd R3 R2 The difference between references 3 and 2 S R1 R2 R3 The summation of references 1 and 2 less reference 3 S R1 R3 R2 The summation of references 1 and 3 less reference 2 Spd Fixed po Sol is constant and is set by parameter Fixed Freq n TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved Default Spd Fixed 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Seq Configure Group 07 11 03 08_GB Sequen
251. terminal blocks each of which pulls apart for ease of field wiring TB1 analog input analog output and digital output terminals TB2 output relay 1 R1 TB3 output relay 2 R2 e TB4 digital input terminals See page 13 for specification information concerning these features Table 17 describes the control terminals O Enhanced O O On side of On side of terminal block terminal block DIP switches O Modbus Communication Port Figure 6 WF2 Control Terminals TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Connections Terminal Description TB1 Terminal Block AO Analog output 1 This terminal may output 0 to 10 V DC 5 mA DC maxi mum The type of signal output from this terminal is set with parameter AQ1 Configure see page 120 for more information with the default set ting being Motor Spd motor speed Al Analog output 2 This terminal outputs 0 to 20 mA DC by default but may be re configured to 4 to 20 mA DC by using parameter AQ2 Output Type see page 121 The type of signal output from this terminal is set with pa rameter AQ2 Configure see page 120 for more information with the de fault setting being Out Torque A11 A12 These two terminals comprise Analog Input 1 with A11 being the positive input and A12 being the negative input The default setting for this input is Normal this may be changed by re
252. that you may select a different display for the Operate mode Parameter Display Mode allows you to select a display that shows a custom unit instead of output frequency Alternately this parameter allows you to choose to display retention time See page 127 for more information on this parameter Programming Mode As described in table 24 on page 54 Programming mode is entered by pressing either the PROG key to access Level 1 parameters or SHIFT PROG to access Level 2 parame ters See page 75 for the parameters in each programming level Programming is slightly different for each level as explained in the following paragraphs Note that if no keys are pressed for 10 minutes while Programming mode is active the drive will automatically re vert to the Operate mode To program a parameter s value in Level 1 programming perform the following steps TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Set up and Getting Started 1 Press PROG to initiate Level 1 programming The Operate display will change to the list of parameters in Level 1 programming An arrowhead indicates which one is selected 2 If the desired parameter is indicated by the arrowhead press ENTER to select the pa rameter and display its current value If the indicated parameter is not the one you want to program use the up or down arrow keys to move the arrowhead to the desired pa rameter and then press ENTER to
253. the lower threshold expressed as a percentage of the full analog input range for an analog input signal When the input signal at analog input 1 or 2 falls below the value in this parameter that condition may be used to advance the Sequencer from step n to another step See parameters Go Next Step n and Goto X Step n for more information 0 Range 0 00 100 00 Default 0 00 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Seq Configure Group 07 11 03 08_GB Sequencer Application Al High Thres n Address See chapter 11 This parameter configures the upper threshold expressed as a percentage of the full ana log input range for an analog input signal When the input signal at analog input 1 or 2 goes above the value in this parameter that condition may be used to advance the Sequencer from step n to another step See parameters Go Next Step n and Goto X Step n for more information 0 Range 0 00 100 00 Default 0 00 X Step n Address See chapter 11 This parameter specifies the step to which to advance when the condition of parameter Goto X Step n is met The following may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Disabled The Sequencer will not advance Step 1 Step 1 Step 2 Step 2 Step 3 Step 3 Step 4 Step 4 Step 5 Step 5 Step 6 Step 6 Step 7 Step 7 Step 8 Step 8 Step 9 Step 9 Step 10 Step 10 0 Range see table Defa
254. the motor or by deactivating the setpoint is inadequate This is why the drive converter must be isolated from the line voltage During operation all covers and doors shall be kept closed Measuring instruments must be connected and disconnected only in de energized condi tion Unauthorized conversions or modifications on or in the drive converter and its components and accessories will render all warranty claims void When installing an option board observe the installation specification valid for this board Please contact BERGES if conversions or modifications are necessary particularly if elec trical components are involved 7 Maintenance and Servicing The manufacturer s documentation shall be followed KEEP SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN A SAFE PLACE TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 2 Introduction 2 4 Product Overview The WF2 drive is powerful and versatile Its standard NEMA 1 IP31 enclosure removes the need for mounting in a separate enclosure It is also available in a NEMA 12 IP55 version for dusty environments and an IP66 version that complies with NSF and BISSC certifica tion these are designated N models An X in the following table indicates the models that are currently available see section 3 1 on page 10 for information about the model number for a particular model all models except 18 5 to 55 0 kW models are available in NSF BISSC certified configurations KW rati
255. the other modes are mounted Once you navigate to this mode by pressing the MENU key on the keypad you may highlight the desired mode by pressing the up or down arrow key and then pressing the ENT key The selected mode will then become active and the display for the mode will be shown on the keypad The Active Faults Mode When a fault occurs the Active Faults mode automatically activates The display for Active Faults shows the phrase Active Fault followed a sequential number The second line shows the description of the fault while line three shows the fault code number See table 29 on page 141 for a list of fault descriptions and codes as well as suggestions for recov ering from the fault condition A typical display would appear as follows Active Fault 3 10 00Hz KYP To recover from a fault correct the condition causing the fault and then press STOP TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Set up and Getting Started The Fault History Mode The enhanced keypad stores the four most recent faults and these are viewed in the Fault History mode This mode is accessed by navigating to the Menu Display Mode and then selecting Fault History The display for Fault History shows the phrase Fault Hist followed a sequential number with number 1 indicating the most recent fault The second line shows the description of the fault while line three shows the fault
256. the preceding bullet lt When a list of faults is displayed it moves from one fault to the previous fault After the first fault is displayed it returns to the end Table 24 Functions of the Keys on the Standard Keypad TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 Set up and Getting Started Key Function The ENTER key is used in a variety of ways Asdescribed above for the SHIFT key it is used in conjunction with SHIFT to access Active Fault and Fault History displays You may want to reset the fault from the Active Fault display by pressing the STOP key Whena parameter group is highlighted ENTER accesses the first parameter in that group if this is the first time that the parameter group was accessed or the last parameter accessed Whena parameter is highlighted in the list of parameters in a group ENTER displays the current setting for the parameter When a parameter s value is shown and a new value is set ENTER stores the new value in memory and returns to the list of parameters Parameter Enter Key may be configured to allow this key to act as a toggle Switch between Local or Remote modes or between Terminal Strip and Key pad control modes see page 88 for more information on this parameter The PROG key is used in a variety of ways When pressed by itself it initiates Level 1 programming The display will then show the first parame
257. the same name as the digital input in the Digital Inputs Group see pag es 111 and 113 for more information Figure 7 on page 39 provides an illus tration of a typical digital input configuration Digital input In 3 wire control this must be a Stop input In 2 wire control it may be configured to another function with parameter D2 Configure see page 110 for more information Figure 7 on page 39 provides an illustration of a typical digital input configuration D1 Digital input This must be a Start or Run input Figure 7 on page 39 pro vides an illustration of a typical digital input configuration Table 17 Description of WF2 Control Terminals 5 6 2 Configuring the Type and Range of Analog Inputs 38 Either a 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 5 V DC 10 V DC or a 0 4 to 20 mA DC input signal may be sent to Analog Input 1 and Analog Input 2 The selection of whether the input signal is volt age or current as well as the voltage range and burden is made via the DIP switch bank labeled SW1 located near terminal DQ3 see figure 6 on page 36 When connecting process current inputs pay particular attention to the input impedance for the drive see table 18 and table 19 on page 39 If one process control device must be con nected to multiple WF2 drives Analog Input 1 should be used with input terminals A11 and A12 connected in series between the drives that is terminal A12 on drive 1 connects to terminal A11 on drive 2
258. tion For further information on using serial commu nication to enable PID control see parameter Cntl Word 2 on page 134 Range see table Default No PID PID Direct Type Address 0651 This parameter sets whether the PID control loop is direct acting or reverse acting inverse acting Direct acting systems are characterized by the process variable sensed by the transducer diminishing as the setpoint is approached Conversely reverse acting systems are characterized by the process variable increasing as the setpoint is approached The fol lowing values may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Direct Direct acting PID control loop Reverse Reverse acting PID control loop Range see table Default Direct Feedback Config Address 0652 This parameter configures the source of the feedback signal which may be either Ref 1 Ref 2 or Ref 3 These references are in turn configurable to be set by analog input 1 or 2 of the WF2 drive or analog input A B or C of the Analog Input Output Option Board see page 90 for more information The following sources may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Ref 1 Reference 1 Ref 2 Reference 2 Ref 3 Reference 3 0 Range see table Default Ref 1 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB PID Configure Group ATTENTION 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters PID Prop Gain A
259. tion causing the fault and then reset the drive to return to the Operate mode However if all three active fault displays only show warnings you may return to the Operate mode by pressing SHIFT ENTER In addition to the active faults the drive maintains a history of faults The three most recent faults are kept in the fault history log The log is accessed by pressing SHIFT ENTER As shown figure 25 the display is the same as for active faults except that an H is shown in the upper left corner See table 29 on page 141 for a description of fault codes After viewing the fault history log return to the Operate mode by pressing SHIFT ENTER 6 2 4 Description of the LEDs on the Standard Keypad The display window on the digital keypad has five LEDs The LEDs provide information about the drive s operating condition as shown in the table below TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 58 6 3 Quick Start 07 11 03 08 GB Set up and Getting Started LED Name Duration Operating Condition RUN Continuous The WF2 drive is operating WARNING Continuous Abnormal operation is detected but the abnormality is not se vere enough to cause a fault Abnormal operation is detected but the abnormality is greater FAULT Continuous than a warning The drive will halt operation when a fault is de tected Continuous The drive is ready to be programmed PROG Flashin The driv
260. to the WF2 drive to which the parameter set will be down loaded To download the parameter set perform the following steps 1 On the EKP press the MENU button 2 Use the cursor to navigate to the keypad setup screen 3 Press ENT 4 Highlight the option entitled DNload EEPROM which is the download parameter 5 Press the ENT key twice to execute the download operation When the download oper ation starts the display will show the following information The model number of the source drive for example WF2C1S010 The MCP code revision of the source drive for example MCP3 90 and The application number being transferred for example WO1V131 During the download operation the display will indicate TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 67 Set up and Getting Started 68 EKP gt gt gt gt DRV 6 Once the download operation is complete activate the downloaded parameter set in the destination drive by loading it from the stored customer set To accomplish this navigate to parameter Param STO RCL and select Load Param The downloaded parameter will then become the active parameter set NOTE Some model specific adjustments may be required if the model number of the source and destination drives are not identical 6 4 4 LEDs on the Enhanced Keypad The enhanced keypad features three LEDs to provide status information The following ta ble describes these three LEDS
261. tput Load OVERVOLTAGE Input voltage is too high LOW VOLTAGE Input voltage is too low Output CURRENT LIM Drive is in Current Limit Frequency TORQUE LIM Drive is in Torque Limit HI CURRENT High current warning HI TEMP High temperature warning JOG Jog operation is active ZERO SPEED Run command active but no reference ACCELERATE Drive is accelerating DECELERATE Drive is decelerating Mode FORWARD Drive is at speed in Forward direction REVERSE Drive is at speed in Reverse direction F Running Forward DC INJECT DC injection braking is active R Running Reverse KPAD STOP Drive stopped from the keypad S Reference freq being set LS LOCKOUT Line start lockout Drive is stopped FLY CATCH Catch on the fly start in progress MAINS LOSS Power is not being applied to mains input that is it s feeding via the DC bus 56 Figure 23 Sample Operate Display and What Information May Be Shown Operate Mode The Operate mode is entered automatically approximately one second after the power up display is shown which provides information about the software version of the drive The Operate mode is the principal mode for the standard keypad The display for this mode provides operational information about the WF2 drive Figure 23 on the previous page shows a typical Operate display and notes what the various codes shown in the display mean Note that if more than one status is active the higher priority status will be shown Also note
262. trol The following sections describe the keys found on the enhanced keypad and explain how to navigate to various displays 6 4 2 Keys on the Enhanced Keypad Table 25 on page 61 describes the functions of the keys found on the enhanced keypad when the keypad is the active control source 4 lines by 16 character display POWER WARNING FAULT Figure 26 The Enhanced Keypad for WF2 Drives TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Set up and Getting Started Key O Z Description This key performs two functions When pressed by itself it acts as the F1 function key the function of which is defined by parameter F1 Key Config see page 129 When SHIFT is pressed at the same time as this key the keypad enters Monitor Mode see page 62 for more information on this mode O U A This key performs two functions When pressed by itself it acts as the F2 function key the function of which is defined by parameter F2 Key Config see page 129 When SHIFT is pressed at the same time as this key the keypad enters Operate Mode see page 62 for more information on this mode v gt A This key performs two functions When pressed by itself it acts as the F3 function key the function of which is defined by parameter F3 Key Config see page 129 When SHIFT is pressed at the same time as this key the keypad enters Parameter Mode see page 63 for more in
263. trol path TS C amp R The terminal strip is the control path for both the reference frequency and start stop commands Kpd R TS C The terminal strip is the control path for start stop commands while the keypad is the control path for the reference frequency TS R Kpd C The keypad is the control path for start stop commands while the terminal strip is the control path for the reference frequency Nm R Ser C The control path for the reference frequency is as specified by the Termi nal Keypad parameter while the serial link is the control path for start stop commands TS C Ser R The serial link is the control path for the reference frequency while the ter minal strip is the control path for start stop commands Serial Lnk When Local mode is active the control path is set by the Terminal Keypad parameter although control via the serial link may be asserted if desired when Remote mode is active the serial link sets the control path and can not be overridden using the SLO bit of Cntl Word 1 This setting forces the Local Config parameter to Nm non Ser 6 7 Serial Link Communication The WF2 drive provides a serial link to support remote communication The serial link sup ports ASCII or RTU communication utilizing Modbus protocol Modbus functions 3 6 and 16 are supported by the WF2 drive In addition DeviceNet Metasys N2 and Siemens P1 protocols are supported by the WF2 drive See page 145 for further information on
264. tware revision number for the keypad will also be shown After showing this informa tion the display will change to that for the Operate mode and only the Power LED will be lit Press the FWD key on the keypad 5 Press the up arrow key to increase the desired running frequency When the motor starts to turn check the direction of rotation If the motor is turning in the wrong direction stop the drive Remove AC power and wait five minutes Then re verse any two motor leads at M1 M2 or M3 and restore AC power Use the up and down arrow keys along with the STOP and FWD keys to control the oper ation of the drive TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 59 Set up and Getting Started 60 6 4 Description of the Enhanced Keypad 6 4 1 Introduction The WF2 enhanced keypad is standard with NSF certified models and optional on other models rated 11 kW and above The enhanced keypad is also available for use in hand held and remote door mount installations see section 9 for further information It offers a significantly different look and feel for programming It also allows you to monitor important WF2 parameters Figure 26 shows the enhanced keypad The enhanced keypad provides a 4 line by 16 character display twice as large as that found on the standard keypad three LEDs for status information a 0 9 numeric keypad with decimal and several function keys that are used for navigation and con
265. ult Disabled TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 155 Summary of WF2 Parameters 11 Summary of WF2 Parameters 11 1 Parameter Groups Display Displayed See Display Displayed See Order Group Name Page Order Group Name Page 1 Security 75 13 Braking Options 106 2 Drive ID 76 14 Digital Inputs 110 3 Drive Status 78 15 Analog Inputs 113 4 Input Status 81 16 Digital Outputs 117 5 Control Modes 83 17 Analog Outputs 120 6 Speed Reference 88 18 Fault Management 122 7 Ramps 92 19 Display Options 127 8 Preset Speeds 96 20 Special 130 9 Skip Freq 97 21 Communication 131 10 Torque Limits 98 22 PID Configure 135 11 Drive Output 100 23 Seq Configure 148 12 Motor Setup 103 Table 30 The Parameter Groups for the WF2 Drive 11 2 Parameters Available in Level 1 Programming Standard Keypad Only Display Parameter See Display Parameter See Order Name Page Order Name Page 1 Output Freq 78 11 Minimum Freq 88 2 Output Voltage 78 12 Maximum Freq 89 3 Output Current 78 13 Accel Time 1 92 4 Drive Load 78 14 Decel Time 1 92 5 Drive Temp 79 15 Preset Speed 1 96 6 DC Bus Voltage 79 16 Preset Speed 2 96 7 2 Wire 3 Wire 83 17 Preset Speed 3 96 8 Jog Mode 84 18 A1 Configure 113 9 Reverse Mode 85 19 R1 Configure 118 10 Terminal Keypad 85 20 R2 Configure 118 Table 31 Parameters Available in Lev
266. unc Drv in Rem Drive is in Remote mode Jogging Jogging operation begins Curr Lvl 1 Value of parameter Current Level 1 is exceeded Curr Lvl 2 Value of parameter Current Level 2 is exceeded Trq Lvl 1 Value of parameter Torque Level 1 is exceeded Trq Lvl 2 Value of parameter Torque Level 2 is exceeded Frq Lvl 1 Value of parameter Freq Level 1 is exceeded Frq Lvl 2 Value of parameter Freq Level 2 is exceeded Frq Lvl 3 Value of parameter Freq Level 3 is exceeded Temp Lvl Value of parameter Drive Temp Lvl is exceeded In Cur Lim Current Limit mode is active In Trq Lim Torque Limit mode is active Loss Ref Loss of 4 to 20 mA DC follower In Ser L Ctrl Serial link is the control path In Ser L Ovrd Control by serial link is overridden Zero Speed The drive is in Run mode but the speed reference is 0 Hz Frq Low Th The output frequency falls below parameter Low Freq Thres PID High The output from the PID loop exceeds parameter PID High Alarm PID Low The output from the PID loop falls below parameter PID Low Alarm By Ser Lnk Parameter Cntl Word 2 controls the output Auto Reset An automatic reset of a fault is pending TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved Default Drive Rdy 117 WF2 0 75 55 0 Parameters 118 DQ2 Configure Address 0771 This parameter configures what action or state causes digital output 2 terminal DQ2 to be come active true The functions that may be assigned to this parameter are the
267. unication DC Injection Braking by DI The WF2 drive supports DC injection braking to assist in stopping high inertia loads A dig ital input D2 to D10 for 2 wire control or D3 to D10 for 3 wire control see page 110 may be selected as the input to activate DC injection braking and the parameter that controls the functionality of the selected input is set for DC injection braking When controlled by a digital input DC injection braking is not a timed function As long as the selected digital input is active direct current will be injected into the motor Speed Potentiometer A speed potentiometer may be connected to Analog Input 2 the A21 terminal as shown in figure 14 Analog Input 1 the A11 and A12 terminals may also be configured to accept a speed potentiometer input TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 47 Connections 48 TB1 AO CM A1 CM A11 A12 10 A21 CM CM CM DPQ DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 Oo 9 O Oo O Figure 14 Connections for a Typical Speed Potentiometer 5 6 4 Control Wiring Connections Active Low Logic The previous section described typical wiring connections when Active High logic is used for the digital inputs In this section provides starting on the next page the typical control wiring connections when the digital inputs use Active Low logic pull down logic Active Low logic is selected by setting parameter
268. ure is set to 4 20 mA the setting of this parameter is ignored NOTES The minimum difference between offset and span will be limited to 10 If offset is set to a value greater than span zero speed output will result Range 0 0 200 0 Default 100 096 A2 Offset Address 0754 Provided parameter A2 Configure is not set to 4 20 mA this parameter is used to alter the starting value of the input being sent to terminal A21 For example with a 0 to 20 mA DC input setting this parameter to a value of 20 alters the range to 4 to 20 mA DC If parameter A2 Configure is set to 4 20 mA the setting of this parameter is ignored NOTE The minimum difference between offset and span will be limited to 10 If offset is Set to a value greater than span zero speed output will result Range 0 0 100 0 Default 0 096 A2 Filter Time Address 0755 This parameter sets the filter time for the analog input signal to terminal A21 Longer filter times better reduce noise disturbances but may slow the signal response time Range 1 1000 ms Default 5 ms TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 115 Parameters 116 Analog Inputs Group AINA Invert Address 0260 AINB Invert Address 0265 AINC Invert Address 0270 These parameters configure whether the signal being sent to the A B or C analog input terminal of the Analog Input Output Option Board is inverted that is whether the minimum input corresponds to the maxi
269. ve middle portion linear The degree of curvature is set by parameter Main S Rounding see the next page Range see table Default Linear Main S Rounding Address 0453 If parameter Main Ramp Type is set to S Curve this parameter sets the amount of curva ture at either end of the ramp A value of 0 s produces a linear curve while a value of 10 s produces a maximally rounded S shaped curve Range 0 0 10 0 s Default 0 0 s AR1 Ramp Type Address 0454 This parameter determines the shape of Alternate Ramp 1 AR1 The following functions may be assigned to this parameter Display Function Linear The shape of the ramp is a straight line The shape of the ramp is curved at the beginning and end with the S Curve middle portion linear The degree of curvature is set by parameter AR1 S Rounding see below Range see table Default Linear AR1 S Rounding Address 0455 If parameter AR1 Ramp Type is set to S Curve this parameter determines the amount of curvature at either end of the ramp A value of 0 s produces a linear curve while a value of 10 s produces a maximally rounded S shaped curve Range 0 0 10 0 s Default 0 0 s TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB 07 11 03 08 GB Parameters AR1 Switch Freq Address 0462 This parameter sets the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration when the AR1 ramp is active Note that i
270. vector control SVC constant torque characteristic This CT SVC setting forces Set V Boost and Slip Comp parameters to Automatic and they cannot be set to another function Variable torque with SVC type quadratic voltage characteristic This VT SVC setting forces Set V Boost and Slip Comp parameters to Automatic and they cannot be set to another function Constant torque with SVC type two piece voltage characteristic This setting forces Set V Boost and Slip Comp parameters to Automatic CT SVC 2pc However parameter V Boost Config may be set to provide additional starting torque with parameters Boost Taper Frq and Boost Taper VIt defining the point on the theoretical curve where boost ceases Constant torque with V Hz control and linear voltage characteristic Pa rameter Set V Boost is set to None but may be changed to Automatic AS with boost ceasing atthe field weakening point Parameter Slip Comp is set to None but may be changed to Automatic Variable torque with V Hz control and quadratic voltage characteristic VT V Hz Parameter Set V Boost is set to Automatic but may be changed to None with boost ceasing at the field weakening point Parameter Slip Comp is set to None but may be changed to Automatic Constant torque with V Hz linear two piece voltage characteristic Pa rameter Set V Boost is set to Automatic but it may be changed to CT V Hz 2pc None with parameters Boost Taper Frq and Boost Taper
271. warranty 5 4 Terminals Found on the WF2 Power Board 5 4 1 Description of the Terminals Figure 4 shows the power terminals for the WF2 drive Table 12 describes the terminals Terminal Description GND Earth ground PE L1 R These terminals are the line connections for three phase models Single L2 S phase models will only have the L1 R terminal with the other two terminals be L3 T ling replaced by a terminal labeled N Table 12 Description of WF2 Power Terminals 07 11 03 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 08 GB WF2 0 75 55 0 31 Connections Terminal B B or B DB1 The B B terminals or B DB1 terminals depending on the model M provide Description a connection to the DC Bus They may be used for common DC Bus connec tions or for powering the drive from a DC source If the drive is powered from a DC source disable phase failure detection by setting parameter Input Phase Fit to disabled see page 122 for more information Alternately by connecting a dynamic brake unit to these terminals braking ca pacity may be enhanced See page 34 for more information DB B or DB1 The DB B terminals or DB DB1 terminals depending on the mode are the connection points for the internal dynamic brake resistor If an external resistor is used for dynamic braking the internal resistor must be disconnected see page 34 for more information T1 U
272. witch must be amply dimensioned because capacitive compensating currents cable screens filters can easily lead to accidental re lease Possible reasons why a fault current safety switch is triggered accidentally Capacitive leakage currents of the line shielding occur during operation especially in the case of long shielded motor feed lines Simultaneous connection of several inverters to the network Use of additional line filters 5 2 5 Considerations for Control Wiring 28 Control wiring refers to the wires connected to the control terminal strip Select control wir ing as follows Shielded wire is recommended to prevent electrical noise interference from causing im proper operation or nuisance tripping lt Use only UL CUL and VDE recognized wire lt Wire voltage rating must be at least 300 V for 230 V AC systems Model Number 208 V AC 230 V AC WF2K Line mm Motor mm Line mm Motor mm 2S00 7x 2 5 2 5 2S01 5x 4 0 4 0 2S02 2x 6 0 6 0 2000 7x 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2001 5x 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2002 2x 4 0 4 0 2 5 2 5 2003 7x 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 2005 5x 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 2007 5x 10 0 I 10 0 I 10 0 10 0 Table 8 Recommended Wire Gauges 230 V AC Models TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved 07 11 03 WF2 0 75 55 0 08 GB Connections Model Number 208 V AC 230 V AC WF2K Line mm Motor mm
273. word pa rameter If they match access is granted 0 Range 0 9999 TB Wood s and Berges All Rights Reserved WF2 0 75 55 0 Default 0 75 Parameters Drive ID Group Set Password Address 0299 If this parameter is set to a non zero value security is enabled A user must enter the value of this parameter in the Enter Password parameter to program the parameters that are made available by the Access Level parameter Range 0 9999 Default O Access Level Address 0297 The WF2 drive provides two levels of access This parameter sets which access level is enabled which in turn determines which parameter groups may be accessed and adjusted The functions that may be assigned to this parameter and what each signifies are shown below Display Function You may read all parameters and configure the non read only param Configure RN eters if the drive is stopped You may read all parameters and configure the non read only param Confio Run eters whether the drive is stopped or running although some param 9 eters such as those for digital inputs may only be configured when the drive is stopped Range see table Default Configure 7 4 Drive ID Group 76 This parameter group shows information about the WF2 drive including its serial number and the versions of software installed Drive Type Read Only Address 0999 This parameter displays the type of drive The foll

English

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents